1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2 % 3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5 % 6 \def\texinfoversion{2004-11-25.16} 7 % 8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software 10 % Foundation, Inc. 11 % 12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or 13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at 15 % your option) any later version. 16 % 17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20 % General Public License for more details. 21 % 22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write 24 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, 25 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. 26 % 27 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 28 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 29 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 30 % 31 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 32 % reports; you can get the latest version from: 33 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 34 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 35 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 36 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 37 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 38 % 39 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo (a] gnu.org. Please include including a 40 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 41 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 42 % 43 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 44 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 45 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 46 % tex foo.texi 47 % texindex foo.?? 48 % tex foo.texi 49 % tex foo.texi 50 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 51 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 52 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 53 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 54 % 55 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 56 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 57 % full Texinfo distribution. 58 % 59 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 60 61 62 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 63 64 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number 65 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 66 % they might have appeared in the input file name. 67 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 69 70 \message{Basics,} 71 \chardef\other=12 72 73 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75 \let\+ = \relax 76 77 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78 \let\ptexb=\b 79 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80 \let\ptexc=\c 81 \let\ptexcomma=\, 82 \let\ptexdot=\. 83 \let\ptexdots=\dots 84 \let\ptexend=\end 85 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86 \let\ptexexclam=\! 87 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88 \let\ptexgtr=> 89 \let\ptexhat=^ 90 \let\ptexi=\i 91 \let\ptexindent=\indent 92 \let\ptexinsert=\insert 93 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94 \let\ptexless=< 95 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97 \let\ptexplus=+ 98 \let\ptexrbrace=\} 99 \let\ptexslash=\/ 100 \let\ptexstar=\* 101 \let\ptext=\t 102 103 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 104 % starts a new line in the output. 105 \newlinechar = `^^J 106 107 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 108 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 109 % 110 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 111 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 112 \else 113 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 114 \fi 115 116 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 117 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 118 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 119 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 120 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 121 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 122 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 123 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 124 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 125 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 126 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 127 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 128 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 129 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 130 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 131 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 132 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 133 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 134 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 135 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 136 % 137 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 138 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 139 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 140 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 141 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 142 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 143 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 144 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 145 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 146 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 147 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 148 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 149 % 150 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 151 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 152 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 153 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 154 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 155 156 % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is 157 % in some cases the escape char. 158 \chardef\colonChar = `\: 159 \chardef\commaChar = `\, 160 \chardef\dotChar = `\. 161 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! 162 \chardef\questChar = `\? 163 \chardef\semiChar = `\; 164 \chardef\underChar = `\_ 165 166 \chardef\spaceChar = `\ % 167 \chardef\spacecat = 10 168 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat} 169 170 % Ignore a token. 171 % 172 \def\gobble#1{} 173 174 % The following is used inside several \edef's. 175 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 176 177 % Hyphenation fixes. 178 \hyphenation{ 179 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 180 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 181 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 182 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 183 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 184 spell-ing spell-ings 185 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 186 wide-spread wrap-around 187 } 188 189 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 190 \newdimen\bindingoffset 191 \newdimen\normaloffset 192 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 193 194 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles 195 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 196 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 197 % 198 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 199 200 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 201 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 202 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 203 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 204 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 205 % 206 \def\|{% 207 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 208 \leavevmode 209 % 210 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 211 \vadjust{% 212 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 213 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 214 \vskip-\baselineskip 215 % 216 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 217 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 218 \llap{% 219 % 220 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 221 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 222 % 223 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 224 \hskip 12pt 225 }% 226 }% 227 } 228 229 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 230 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 231 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 232 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 233 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 234 % 235 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 236 \def\loggingall{% 237 \tracingstats2 238 \tracingpages1 239 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 240 \tracingparagraphs1 241 \tracingoutput1 242 \tracingmacros2 243 \tracingrestores1 244 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 245 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 246 \tracingscantokens1 247 \tracingifs1 248 \tracinggroups1 249 \tracingnesting2 250 \tracingassigns1 251 \fi 252 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 253 \errorcontextlines16 254 }% 255 256 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 257 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 258 % 259 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 260 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 261 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 262 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 263 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 264 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 265 266 % For @cropmarks command. 267 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 268 % 269 \newif\ifcropmarks 270 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 271 % 272 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 273 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 274 % 275 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 276 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 277 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 278 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 279 280 % Main output routine. 281 \chardef\PAGE = 255 282 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 283 284 \newbox\headlinebox 285 \newbox\footlinebox 286 287 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 288 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 289 \def\onepageout#1{% 290 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 291 % 292 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 293 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 294 % 295 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 296 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 297 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 298 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 299 % 300 {% 301 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 302 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 303 % before the \shipout runs. 304 % 305 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 306 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 307 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 308 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 309 \shipout\vbox{% 310 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 311 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 312 % 313 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 314 \hsize = \outerhsize 315 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 316 \vtop to0pt{% 317 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 318 \nointerlineskip 319 \line{% 320 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 321 \hfill 322 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 323 }% 324 \vss}% 325 \vskip\topandbottommargin 326 \line\bgroup 327 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 328 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 329 \vbox\bgroup 330 \fi 331 % 332 \unvbox\headlinebox 333 \pagebody{#1}% 334 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 335 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 336 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) 337 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 338 \vskip 2\baselineskip 339 \unvbox\footlinebox 340 \fi 341 % 342 \ifcropmarks 343 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 344 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 345 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 346 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 347 \vbox to0pt{\vss 348 \line{% 349 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 350 \hfill 351 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 352 }% 353 \nointerlineskip 354 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 355 }% 356 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 357 \fi 358 }% end of \shipout\vbox 359 }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive 360 \advancepageno 361 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 362 } 363 364 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 365 366 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 367 {\catcode`\@ =11 368 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 369 % marginal hacks, juha (a] viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 370 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 371 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 372 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 373 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 374 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 375 } 376 377 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 378 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 379 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 380 % 381 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 382 \def\nstop{\vbox 383 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 384 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 385 \def\nsbot{\vbox 386 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 387 388 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 389 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 390 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 391 % 392 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 393 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% 394 \def\next{#2}% 395 \begingroup 396 \obeylines 397 \spaceisspace 398 #1% 399 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 400 } 401 402 {\obeylines % 403 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 404 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 405 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 406 }% 407 } 408 409 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 410 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 411 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 412 413 % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 414 % 415 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 416 % @end itemize @c foo 417 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 418 % by \finishparsearg. 419 % 420 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 421 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 422 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 423 \def\temp{#3}% 424 \ifx\temp\empty 425 % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run; 426 % thus we reuse \temp. 427 \let\temp\finishparsearg 428 \else 429 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 430 \fi 431 % Put the space token in: 432 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 433 } 434 435 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 436 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 437 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 438 % just before passing the control to \next. 439 % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 440 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 441 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. 442 % 443 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 444 % 445 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}} 446 447 % \parseargdef\foo{...} 448 % is roughly equivalent to 449 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 450 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} 451 % 452 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 453 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 454 455 \def\parseargdef#1{% 456 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 457 } 458 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 459 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 460 \def#1##1% 461 } 462 463 % Several utility definitions with active space: 464 { 465 \obeyspaces 466 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 467 468 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 469 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 470 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 471 % should produce a line of output anyway. 472 % 473 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 474 475 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 476 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 477 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 478 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 479 } 480 481 482 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 483 484 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 485 % 486 % \envdef\foo{...} 487 % \def\Efoo{...} 488 % 489 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 490 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 491 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 492 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 493 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 494 % 495 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 496 % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The 497 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 498 % special case.) 499 500 501 % At runtime, environments start with this: 502 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 503 % initialize 504 \let\thisenv\empty 505 506 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 507 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 508 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 509 510 % Check whether we're in the right environment: 511 \def\checkenv#1{% 512 \def\temp{#1}% 513 \ifx\thisenv\temp 514 \else 515 \badenverr 516 \fi 517 } 518 519 % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: 520 \def\badenverr{% 521 \errhelp = \EMsimple 522 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 523 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 524 } 525 \def\inenvironment#1{% 526 \ifx#1\empty 527 out of any environment% 528 \else 529 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 530 \fi 531 } 532 533 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 534 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 535 % 536 \parseargdef\end{% 537 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 538 \else 539 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 540 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 541 \csname E#1\endcsname 542 \endgroup 543 \fi 544 } 545 546 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 547 548 549 %% Simple single-character @ commands 550 551 % @@ prints an @ 552 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 553 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} 554 555 % This is turned off because it was never documented 556 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 557 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 558 %% but suppressing ligatures. 559 %\def\`{{`}} 560 %\def\'{{'}} 561 562 % Used to generate quoted braces. 563 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 564 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 565 \let\{=\mylbrace 566 \let\}=\myrbrace 567 \begingroup 568 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 569 % and @{ and @} for the aux file. 570 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 571 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 572 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 573 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 574 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 575 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 576 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 577 !endgroup 578 579 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 580 \let\comma = , 581 582 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 583 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 584 \let\, = \c 585 \let\dotaccent = \. 586 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 587 \let\tieaccent = \t 588 \let\ubaraccent = \b 589 \let\udotaccent = \d 590 591 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 592 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 593 \def\questiondown{?`} 594 \def\exclamdown{!`} 595 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 596 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 597 598 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 599 \def\imacro{i} 600 \def\jmacro{j} 601 \def\dotless#1{% 602 \def\temp{#1}% 603 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi 604 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j 605 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 606 \fi\fi 607 } 608 609 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 610 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 611 % 612 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 613 614 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 615 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 616 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 617 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 618 % \scriptscriptstyle). 619 % 620 \def\LaTeX{% 621 L\kern-.36em 622 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 623 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 624 \kern-.15em 625 \TeX 626 } 627 628 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 629 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 630 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 631 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 632 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 633 {\catcode`@ = 11 634 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 635 % if the definition is written into an index file. 636 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 637 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 638 } 639 640 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. 641 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 642 643 % @* forces a line break. 644 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 645 646 % @/ allows a line break. 647 \let\/=\allowbreak 648 649 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. 650 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } 651 652 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 653 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } 654 655 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. 656 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } 657 658 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 659 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 660 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 661 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 662 663 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 664 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 665 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 666 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 667 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 668 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 669 % the text is small, which looks bad. 670 % 671 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 672 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 673 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 674 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 675 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 676 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 677 % 678 \newbox\groupbox 679 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} 680 % 681 \envdef\group{% 682 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 683 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 684 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 685 \fi 686 \startsavinginserts 687 % 688 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 689 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 690 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 691 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 692 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 693 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 694 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 695 \comment 696 } 697 % 698 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 699 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 700 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 701 % above. But it's pretty close. 702 \def\Egroup{% 703 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 704 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 705 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 706 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 707 \egroup % End the \vtop. 708 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 709 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 710 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 711 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 712 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 713 % group, force a page break. 714 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 715 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 716 \page 717 \fi 718 \fi 719 \box\groupbox 720 \prevdepth = \dimen1 721 \checkinserts 722 } 723 % 724 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 725 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 726 % 727 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 728 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 729 where each line of input produces a line of output.} 730 731 % @need space-in-mils 732 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 733 734 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 735 736 % Old definition--didn't work. 737 %\parseargdef\need{\par % 738 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 739 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. 740 %{\baselineskip=0pt% 741 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 742 %\prevdepth=-1000pt 743 %}} 744 745 \parseargdef\need{% 746 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 747 % paragraph. 748 \par 749 % 750 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 751 \dimen0 = #1\mil 752 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 753 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 754 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 755 % 756 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 757 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 758 % And a page break here is fine. 759 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 760 % 761 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 762 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 763 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 764 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 765 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 766 % 767 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 768 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 769 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 770 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 771 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 772 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 773 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 774 \penalty9999 775 % 776 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 777 \kern -#1\mil 778 % 779 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 780 \nobreak 781 \fi 782 } 783 784 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 785 786 \let\br = \par 787 788 % @page forces the start of a new page. 789 % 790 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 791 792 % @exdent text.... 793 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 794 795 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 796 % That's how much \exdent should take out. 797 \newskip\exdentamount 798 799 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 800 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 801 802 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 803 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 804 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 805 806 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 807 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 808 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 809 % 810 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 811 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 812 % 813 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 814 \nobreak 815 \kern-\strutdepth 816 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 817 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 818 \vss 819 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 820 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 821 \ifx#1l% 822 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 823 \else 824 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 825 \fi 826 \null 827 }% 828 }} 829 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 830 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 831 % 832 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 833 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 834 % else use TEXT for both). 835 % 836 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 837 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 838 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 839 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 840 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 841 \def\righttext{#2}% 842 \else 843 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 844 \def\righttext{#1}% 845 \fi 846 % 847 \ifodd\pageno 848 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 849 \else 850 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 851 \fi 852 \temp 853 } 854 855 % @include file insert text of that file as input. 856 % 857 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 858 \def\includezzz#1{% 859 \pushthisfilestack 860 \def\thisfile{#1}% 861 {% 862 \makevalueexpandable 863 \def\temp{\input #1 }% 864 \expandafter 865 }\temp 866 \popthisfilestack 867 } 868 \def\filenamecatcodes{% 869 \catcode`\\=\other 870 \catcode`~=\other 871 \catcode`^=\other 872 \catcode`_=\other 873 \catcode`|=\other 874 \catcode`<=\other 875 \catcode`>=\other 876 \catcode`+=\other 877 \catcode`-=\other 878 } 879 880 \def\pushthisfilestack{% 881 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 882 } 883 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% 884 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 885 } 886 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 887 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 888 } 889 890 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 891 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 892 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 893 894 \def\thisfile{} 895 896 % @center line 897 % outputs that line, centered. 898 % 899 \parseargdef\center{% 900 \ifhmode 901 \let\next\centerH 902 \else 903 \let\next\centerV 904 \fi 905 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 906 } 907 \def\centerH#1{% 908 {% 909 \hfil\break 910 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 911 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 912 \line{#1}% 913 \break 914 }% 915 } 916 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 917 918 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 919 920 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 921 922 % @comment ...line which is ignored... 923 % @c is the same as @comment 924 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 925 926 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 927 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 928 \commentxxx} 929 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 930 931 \let\c=\comment 932 933 % @paragraphindent NCHARS 934 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 935 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 936 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 937 % 938 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 939 \def\noneword{none} 940 % 941 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 942 \def\temp{#1}% 943 \ifx\temp\asisword 944 \else 945 \ifx\temp\noneword 946 \defaultparindent = 0pt 947 \else 948 \defaultparindent = #1em 949 \fi 950 \fi 951 \parindent = \defaultparindent 952 } 953 954 % @exampleindent NCHARS 955 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 956 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 957 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 958 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% 959 \def\temp{#1}% 960 \ifx\temp\asisword 961 \else 962 \ifx\temp\noneword 963 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 964 \else 965 \lispnarrowing = #1em 966 \fi 967 \fi 968 } 969 970 % @firstparagraphindent WORD 971 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 972 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 973 % paragraphs. 974 % 975 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 976 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 977 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 978 % By default, we suppress indentation. 979 % 980 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 981 \def\insertword{insert} 982 % 983 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 984 \def\temp{#1}% 985 \ifx\temp\noneword 986 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 987 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 988 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 989 \else 990 \errhelp = \EMsimple 991 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 992 \fi\fi 993 } 994 995 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 996 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 997 % 998 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 999 % paragraph. 1000 % 1001 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1002 \gdef\indent{% 1003 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1004 \indent 1005 }% 1006 \gdef\noindent{% 1007 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1008 \noindent 1009 }% 1010 \global\everypar = {% 1011 \kern -\parindent 1012 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1013 }% 1014 } 1015 1016 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1017 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1018 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1019 \global \everypar = {}% 1020 } 1021 1022 1023 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1024 % 1025 \def\asis#1{#1} 1026 1027 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1028 % 1029 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1030 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1031 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1032 % which is what @var uses. 1033 { 1034 \catcode\underChar = \active 1035 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1036 \catcode\underChar=\active 1037 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1038 } 1039 } 1040 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1041 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1042 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1043 % otherwise define @\. 1044 % 1045 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1046 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1047 % 1048 \def\math{% 1049 \tex 1050 \mathunderscore 1051 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1052 \mathactive 1053 $\finishmath 1054 } 1055 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1056 1057 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1058 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1059 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1060 % 1061 { 1062 \catcode`^ = \active 1063 \catcode`< = \active 1064 \catcode`> = \active 1065 \catcode`+ = \active 1066 \gdef\mathactive{% 1067 \let^ = \ptexhat 1068 \let< = \ptexless 1069 \let> = \ptexgtr 1070 \let+ = \ptexplus 1071 } 1072 } 1073 1074 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. 1075 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1076 \def\minus{$-$} 1077 1078 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1079 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter 1080 % font as three actual period characters. 1081 % 1082 \def\dots{% 1083 \leavevmode 1084 \hbox to 1.5em{% 1085 \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil 1086 .\hfil.\hfil.% 1087 \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil 1088 }% 1089 } 1090 1091 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1092 % 1093 \def\enddots{% 1094 \dots 1095 \spacefactor=3000 1096 } 1097 1098 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1099 % Texinfo's parsing. 1100 % 1101 \let\comma = , 1102 1103 % @refill is a no-op. 1104 \let\refill=\relax 1105 1106 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1107 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1108 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1109 % 1110 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1111 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1112 1113 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1114 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1115 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1116 \def\setfilename{% 1117 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1118 \iflinks 1119 \tryauxfile 1120 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1121 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1122 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1123 \openindices 1124 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1125 % 1126 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1127 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1128 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1129 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1130 \closein 1 1131 % 1132 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1133 } 1134 1135 % Called from \setfilename. 1136 % 1137 \def\openindices{% 1138 \newindex{cp}% 1139 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1140 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1141 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1142 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1143 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1144 } 1145 1146 % @bye. 1147 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1148 1149 1150 \message{pdf,} 1151 % adobe `portable' document format 1152 \newcount\tempnum 1153 \newcount\lnkcount 1154 \newtoks\filename 1155 \newcount\filenamelength 1156 \newcount\pgn 1157 \newtoks\toksA 1158 \newtoks\toksB 1159 \newtoks\toksC 1160 \newtoks\toksD 1161 \newbox\boxA 1162 \newcount\countA 1163 \newif\ifpdf 1164 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1165 1166 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1167 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1168 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1169 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1170 \else 1171 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1172 \else 1173 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1174 \else 1175 \pdftrue 1176 \fi 1177 \fi 1178 \fi 1179 % 1180 \ifpdf 1181 \input pdfcolor 1182 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% 1183 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1184 \def\imagewidth{#2}% 1185 \def\imageheight{#3}% 1186 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1187 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1188 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1189 \immediate\pdfimage 1190 \else 1191 \immediate\pdfximage 1192 \fi 1193 \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi 1194 \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi 1195 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1196 #1.pdf% 1197 \else 1198 {#1.pdf}% 1199 \fi 1200 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1201 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1202 \fi} 1203 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1204 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title 1205 % aren't expanded. 1206 \atdummies 1207 \normalturnoffactive 1208 \pdfdest name{#1} xyz% 1209 }} 1210 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1211 \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light? 1212 \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} 1213 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1214 % come from Petr Olsak 1215 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1216 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1217 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1218 \advance\tempnum by 1 1219 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1220 % 1221 % #1 is the section text. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1222 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node 1223 % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no 1224 % corresponding node. #4 is the page number. 1225 % 1226 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1227 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1228 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1229 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1230 % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured. 1231 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1232 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi 1233 % 1234 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}% 1235 } 1236 % 1237 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1238 \begingroup 1239 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1240 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1241 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1242 % 1243 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1244 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1245 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1246 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1247 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1248 }% 1249 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1250 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1251 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1252 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1253 }% 1254 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1255 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1256 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1257 }% 1258 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1259 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1260 }% 1261 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1262 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1263 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1264 % 1265 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1266 % al. a second time, below. 1267 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1268 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1269 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1270 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1271 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1272 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1273 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1274 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1275 \input \jobname.toc 1276 % 1277 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1278 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1279 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1280 % 1281 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1282 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1283 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1284 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1285 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1286 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1287 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1288 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1289 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1290 % 1291 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1292 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1293 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1294 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1295 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1296 % 1297 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1298 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1299 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1300 \indexnofonts 1301 \turnoffactive 1302 \input \jobname.toc 1303 \endgroup 1304 } 1305 % 1306 \def\makelinks #1,{% 1307 \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% 1308 \ifx\params\E 1309 \let\nextmakelinks=\relax 1310 \else 1311 \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks 1312 \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi 1313 \picknum{#1}% 1314 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 1315 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% 1316 \linkcolor #1% 1317 \advance\lnkcount by 1% 1318 \endlink 1319 \fi 1320 \nextmakelinks 1321 } 1322 \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} 1323 \def\pn#1{% 1324 \def\p{#1}% 1325 \ifx\p\lbrace 1326 \let\nextpn=\ppn 1327 \else 1328 \let\nextpn=\ppnn 1329 \def\first{#1} 1330 \fi 1331 \nextpn 1332 } 1333 \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} 1334 \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} 1335 \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} 1336 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1337 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1338 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1339 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1340 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1341 \fi 1342 \fi 1343 \nextsp} 1344 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1345 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1346 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1347 \else 1348 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1349 \fi 1350 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1351 \begingroup 1352 \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% 1353 \makevalueexpandable 1354 \leavevmode\Red 1355 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1356 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1357 \endgroup} 1358 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1359 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1360 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1361 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1362 \def\maketoks{% 1363 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1364 \ifx\first0\adn0 1365 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1366 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1367 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1368 \else 1369 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1370 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1371 \let\next=\maketoks 1372 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1373 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1374 \fi 1375 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1376 \next} 1377 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1378 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1379 \def\pdflink#1{% 1380 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1381 \linkcolor #1\endlink} 1382 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1383 \else 1384 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1385 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1386 \let\endlink = \relax 1387 \let\linkcolor = \relax 1388 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1389 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1390 1391 1392 \message{fonts,} 1393 1394 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1395 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1396 % italics, not bold italics. 1397 % 1398 \def\setfontstyle#1{% 1399 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1400 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1401 } 1402 1403 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1404 % 1405 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1406 1407 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1408 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1409 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1410 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1411 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1412 1413 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1414 % So we set up a \sf. 1415 \newfam\sffam 1416 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1417 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1418 1419 % We don't need math for this font style. 1420 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1421 1422 % Default leading. 1423 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1424 1425 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1426 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1427 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1428 % 1429 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1430 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1431 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1432 % 1433 \def\setleading#1{% 1434 \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax 1435 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1436 \normalbaselines 1437 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1438 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1439 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1440 }% 1441 } 1442 1443 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1444 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1445 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor 1446 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} 1447 1448 % Use cm as the default font prefix. 1449 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1450 % before you read in texinfo.tex. 1451 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1452 \def\fontprefix{cm} 1453 \fi 1454 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1455 \def\rmshape{r} 1456 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1457 \def\bfshape{b} 1458 \def\bxshape{bx} 1459 \def\ttshape{tt} 1460 \def\ttbshape{tt} 1461 \def\ttslshape{sltt} 1462 \def\itshape{ti} 1463 \def\itbshape{bxti} 1464 \def\slshape{sl} 1465 \def\slbshape{bxsl} 1466 \def\sfshape{ss} 1467 \def\sfbshape{ss} 1468 \def\scshape{csc} 1469 \def\scbshape{csc} 1470 1471 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1472 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1473 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1474 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1475 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1476 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1477 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1478 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1479 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1480 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1481 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} 1482 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1483 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1484 1485 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1486 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} 1487 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} 1488 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} 1489 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1490 1491 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1492 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1493 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} 1494 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} 1495 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} 1496 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} 1497 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} 1498 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} 1499 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} 1500 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} 1501 \font\smalli=cmmi9 1502 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 1503 1504 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1505 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1506 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} 1507 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} 1508 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} 1509 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} 1510 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} 1511 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} 1512 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} 1513 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} 1514 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 1515 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 1516 1517 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1518 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1519 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} 1520 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} 1521 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} 1522 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} 1523 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} 1524 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} 1525 \let\titlebf=\titlerm 1526 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} 1527 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 1528 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 1529 \def\authorrm{\secrm} 1530 \def\authortt{\sectt} 1531 1532 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 1533 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 1534 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} 1535 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} 1536 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} 1537 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} 1538 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} 1539 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} 1540 \let\chapbf=\chaprm 1541 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} 1542 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 1543 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 1544 1545 % Section fonts (14.4pt). 1546 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} 1547 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} 1548 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} 1549 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} 1550 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} 1551 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} 1552 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} 1553 \let\secbf\secrm 1554 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} 1555 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 1556 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 1557 1558 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 1559 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 1560 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} 1561 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} 1562 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} 1563 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} 1564 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} 1565 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} 1566 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm 1567 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} 1568 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 1569 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 1570 1571 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 1572 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 1573 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} 1574 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} 1575 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} 1576 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} 1577 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} 1578 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} 1579 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} 1580 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} 1581 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 1582 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 1583 1584 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 1585 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 1586 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 1587 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 1588 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 1589 % 1590 \def\resetmathfonts{% 1591 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 1592 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 1593 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 1594 } 1595 1596 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 1597 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 1598 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 1599 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 1600 % 1601 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 1602 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 1603 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 1604 % 1605 % This all needs generalizing, badly. 1606 % 1607 \def\textfonts{% 1608 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 1609 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 1610 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 1611 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 1612 \def\curfontsize{text}% 1613 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 1614 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 1615 \def\titlefonts{% 1616 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 1617 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 1618 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 1619 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 1620 \def\curfontsize{title}% 1621 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 1622 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 1623 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 1624 \def\chapfonts{% 1625 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 1626 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 1627 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 1628 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 1629 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 1630 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 1631 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 1632 \def\secfonts{% 1633 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 1634 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 1635 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 1636 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 1637 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 1638 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 1639 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 1640 \def\subsecfonts{% 1641 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 1642 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 1643 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 1644 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 1645 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 1646 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 1647 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 1648 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 1649 \def\reducedfonts{% 1650 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 1651 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 1652 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 1653 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 1654 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 1655 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 1656 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 1657 \def\smallfonts{% 1658 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 1659 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 1660 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 1661 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 1662 \def\curfontsize{small}% 1663 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 1664 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 1665 \def\smallerfonts{% 1666 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 1667 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 1668 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 1669 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 1670 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 1671 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 1672 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 1673 1674 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 1675 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 1676 1677 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 1678 % can fit this many characters: 1679 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 1680 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 1681 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 1682 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 1683 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 1684 % 1685 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 1686 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 1687 % 1688 % I wish the USA used A4 paper. 1689 % --karl, 24jan03. 1690 1691 1692 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 1693 % 1694 \textfonts \rm 1695 1696 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 1697 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} 1698 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} 1699 1700 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 1701 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 1702 1703 % Fonts for short table of contents. 1704 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} 1705 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12 1706 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} 1707 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} 1708 1709 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 1710 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 1711 1712 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 1713 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. 1714 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 1715 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 1716 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 1717 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 1718 1719 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 1720 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. 1721 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 1722 1723 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 1724 % ttsl for book titles, do we? 1725 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 1726 1727 \let\i=\smartitalic 1728 \let\slanted=\smartslanted 1729 \let\var=\smartslanted 1730 \let\dfn=\smartslanted 1731 \let\emph=\smartitalic 1732 1733 % @b, explicit bold. 1734 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 1735 \let\strong=\b 1736 1737 % @sansserif, explicit sans. 1738 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 1739 1740 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 1741 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 1742 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 1743 % 1744 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 1745 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 1746 1747 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 1748 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 1749 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 1750 % 1751 \catcode`@=11 1752 \def\frenchspacing{% 1753 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 1754 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 1755 } 1756 \catcode`@=\other 1757 1758 \def\t#1{% 1759 {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% 1760 \null 1761 } 1762 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} 1763 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} 1764 \font\keysy=cmsy9 1765 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 1766 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 1767 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 1768 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 1769 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 1770 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 1771 % The old definition, with no lozenge: 1772 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 1773 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 1774 1775 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. 1776 \let\file=\samp 1777 \let\option=\samp 1778 1779 % @code is a modification of @t, 1780 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 1781 \def\tclose#1{% 1782 {% 1783 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 1784 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 1785 % 1786 % Switch to typewriter. 1787 \tt 1788 % 1789 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 1790 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 1791 % 1792 % Turn off hyphenation. 1793 \nohyphenation 1794 % 1795 \rawbackslash 1796 \frenchspacing 1797 #1% 1798 }% 1799 \null 1800 } 1801 1802 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 1803 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 1804 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 1805 1806 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 1807 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 1808 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 1809 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 1810 % -- rms. 1811 { 1812 \catcode`\-=\active 1813 \catcode`\_=\active 1814 % 1815 \global\def\code{\begingroup 1816 \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash 1817 \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder 1818 \codex 1819 } 1820 } 1821 1822 \def\realdash{-} 1823 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 1824 \def\codeunder{% 1825 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 1826 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 1827 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 1828 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 1829 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 1830 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 1831 \else\normalunderscore \fi 1832 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 1833 {\_}% 1834 } 1835 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 1836 1837 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 1838 % then @kbd has no effect. 1839 1840 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 1841 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 1842 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 1843 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 1844 \def\arg{#1}% 1845 \ifx\arg\worddistinct 1846 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 1847 \else\ifx\arg\wordexample 1848 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 1849 \else\ifx\arg\wordcode 1850 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 1851 \else 1852 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1853 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}% 1854 \fi\fi\fi 1855 } 1856 \def\worddistinct{distinct} 1857 \def\wordexample{example} 1858 \def\wordcode{code} 1859 1860 % Default is `distinct.' 1861 \kbdinputstyle distinct 1862 1863 \def\xkey{\key} 1864 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 1865 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 1866 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi 1867 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} 1868 1869 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 1870 \let\indicateurl=\code 1871 \let\env=\code 1872 \let\command=\code 1873 1874 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 1875 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 1876 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 1877 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 1878 % a hypertex \special here. 1879 % 1880 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 1881 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 1882 \unsepspaces 1883 \pdfurl{#1}% 1884 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1885 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 1886 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 1887 \else 1888 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1889 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 1890 \ifpdf 1891 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 1892 \else 1893 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 1894 \fi 1895 \else 1896 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 1897 \fi 1898 \fi 1899 \endlink 1900 \endgroup} 1901 1902 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 1903 % 1904 \let\url=\uref 1905 1906 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 1907 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 1908 % 1909 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 1910 \ifpdf 1911 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 1912 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 1913 \unsepspaces 1914 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 1915 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1916 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 1917 \endlink 1918 \endgroup} 1919 \else 1920 \let\email=\uref 1921 \fi 1922 1923 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 1924 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 1925 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 1926 % this property, we can check that font parameter. 1927 % 1928 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 1929 1930 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 1931 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 1932 % 1933 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 1934 1935 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} 1936 1937 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 1938 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 1939 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 1940 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 1941 1942 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 1943 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 1944 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 1945 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 1946 1947 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 1948 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 1949 % all-uppercase. 1950 % 1951 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 1952 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 1953 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 1954 \def\temp{#2}% 1955 \ifx\temp\empty \else 1956 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 1957 \fi 1958 } 1959 1960 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 1961 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 1962 % 1963 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 1964 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 1965 {\frenchspacing #1}% 1966 \def\temp{#2}% 1967 \ifx\temp\empty \else 1968 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 1969 \fi 1970 } 1971 1972 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 1973 % 1974 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} 1975 1976 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 1977 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 1978 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 1979 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 1980 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 1981 % 1982 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 1983 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 1984 % font height. 1985 % 1986 % feymr - regular 1987 % feymo - slanted 1988 % feybr - bold 1989 % feybo - bold slanted 1990 % 1991 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 1992 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 1993 % Hmm. 1994 % 1995 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 1996 % Hope not. 1997 % 1998 % 1999 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2000 \def\eurofont{% 2001 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2002 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2003 % installations which never need the symbold don't have to have the 2004 % font installed. 2005 % 2006 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2007 % that to the current nominal size. 2008 % 2009 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2010 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2011 % 2012 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2013 % 2014 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2015 % bold: 2016 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2017 \else 2018 % regular: 2019 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2020 \fi 2021 \thiseurofont 2022 } 2023 2024 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2025 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2026 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2027 % 2028 \def\registeredsymbol{% 2029 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2030 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2031 }$% 2032 } 2033 2034 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2035 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2036 % so we'll define it if necessary. 2037 % 2038 \ifx\Orb\undefined 2039 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2040 \fi 2041 2042 2043 \message{page headings,} 2044 2045 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 2046 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 2047 2048 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 2049 \newif\ifseenauthor 2050 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage 2051 2052 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 2053 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 2054 % 2055 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2056 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2057 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2058 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2059 2060 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 2061 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 2062 2063 \envdef\titlepage{% 2064 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 2065 \begingroup 2066 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 2067 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 2068 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 2069 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 2070 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2071 % 2072 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 2073 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 2074 \let\oldpage = \page 2075 \def\page{% 2076 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2077 \finishtitlepage 2078 \fi 2079 \let\page = \oldpage 2080 \page 2081 \null 2082 }% 2083 } 2084 2085 \def\Etitlepage{% 2086 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2087 \finishtitlepage 2088 \fi 2089 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 2090 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 2091 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 2092 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 2093 \oldpage 2094 \endgroup 2095 % 2096 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 2097 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 2098 \HEADINGSon 2099 % 2100 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 2101 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2102 \shortcontents 2103 \contents 2104 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2105 \global\let\contents = \relax 2106 \fi 2107 % 2108 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2109 \contents 2110 \global\let\contents = \relax 2111 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2112 \fi 2113 } 2114 2115 \def\finishtitlepage{% 2116 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 2117 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 2118 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2119 } 2120 2121 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 2122 2123 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 2124 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 2125 2126 \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines 2127 \let\tt=\authortt} 2128 2129 \parseargdef\title{% 2130 \checkenv\titlepage 2131 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} 2132 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 2133 \finishedtitlepagefalse 2134 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 2135 } 2136 2137 \parseargdef\subtitle{% 2138 \checkenv\titlepage 2139 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 2140 } 2141 2142 % @author should come last, but may come many times. 2143 % It can also be used inside @quotation. 2144 % 2145 \parseargdef\author{% 2146 \def\temp{\quotation}% 2147 \ifx\thisenv\temp 2148 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 2149 \else 2150 \checkenv\titlepage 2151 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 2152 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% 2153 \fi 2154 } 2155 2156 2157 %%% Set up page headings and footings. 2158 2159 \let\thispage=\folio 2160 2161 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 2162 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 2163 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 2164 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 2165 2166 % Now make TeX use those variables 2167 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 2168 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 2169 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 2170 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 2171 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax 2172 2173 % Commands to set those variables. 2174 % For example, this is what @headings on does 2175 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 2176 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 2177 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| 2178 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile 2179 2180 2181 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 2182 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2183 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2184 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2185 2186 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 2187 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2188 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2189 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2190 2191 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 2192 2193 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 2194 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2195 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2196 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2197 2198 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 2199 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2200 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2201 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 2202 % 2203 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 2204 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 2205 \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip 2206 \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip 2207 } 2208 2209 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 2210 2211 2212 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 2213 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 2214 % @headings off turns them off. 2215 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 2216 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2217 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2218 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 2219 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, 2220 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 2221 2222 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 2223 2224 \def\HEADINGSoff{% 2225 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2226 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 2227 \HEADINGSoff 2228 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 2229 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 2230 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 2231 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 2232 % edge of all pages. 2233 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% 2234 \global\pageno=1 2235 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2236 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2237 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 2238 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2239 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 2240 } 2241 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 2242 2243 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 2244 % page number on top right. 2245 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% 2246 \global\pageno=1 2247 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2248 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2249 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2250 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2251 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 2252 } 2253 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 2254 2255 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 2256 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 2257 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 2258 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2259 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2260 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 2261 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2262 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 2263 } 2264 2265 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 2266 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 2267 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2268 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2269 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2270 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2271 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 2272 } 2273 2274 % Subroutines used in generating headings 2275 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. 2276 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 2277 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 2278 \ifx\today\undefined 2279 \def\today{% 2280 \number\day\space 2281 \ifcase\month 2282 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 2283 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 2284 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 2285 \fi 2286 \space\number\year} 2287 \fi 2288 2289 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 2290 % It generates no output of its own. 2291 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 2292 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 2293 2294 2295 \message{tables,} 2296 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 2297 2298 % default indentation of table text 2299 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 2300 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 2301 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 2302 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. 2303 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 2304 2305 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 2306 \newdimen\itemmax 2307 2308 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 2309 % these defs. 2310 % They also define \itemindex 2311 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 2312 2313 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 2314 2315 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 2316 2317 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 2318 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 2319 2320 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 2321 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 2322 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 2323 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 2324 \itemindex{#1}% 2325 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 2326 % 2327 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 2328 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 2329 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 2330 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 2331 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 2332 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 2333 % 2334 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 2335 % but leave it ragged-right. 2336 \begingroup 2337 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 2338 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 2339 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 2340 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 2341 \endgroup 2342 % 2343 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 2344 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 2345 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 2346 % 2347 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 2348 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 2349 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 2350 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 2351 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 2352 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 2353 % 2354 \penalty 10001 2355 \endgroup 2356 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 2357 \else 2358 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 2359 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 2360 \noindent 2361 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 2362 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 2363 % eventually be printed. 2364 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 2365 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 2366 \unhbox0 2367 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 2368 \endgroup 2369 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 2370 \fi 2371 } 2372 2373 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 2374 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 2375 2376 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. 2377 \envdef\table{% 2378 \let\itemindex\gobble 2379 \tablecheck{table}% 2380 } 2381 \envdef\ftable{% 2382 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 2383 \tablecheck{ftable}% 2384 } 2385 \envdef\vtable{% 2386 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 2387 \tablecheck{vtable}% 2388 } 2389 \def\tablecheck#1{% 2390 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 2391 \endgroup 2392 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 2393 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 2394 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 2395 \else 2396 \let\next\tablex 2397 \fi 2398 \next 2399 } 2400 \def\tablex#1{% 2401 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 2402 \parsearg\tabley 2403 } 2404 \def\tabley#1{% 2405 {% 2406 \makevalueexpandable 2407 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 2408 \expandafter 2409 }\temp \endtablez 2410 } 2411 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 2412 \aboveenvbreak 2413 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 2414 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 2415 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 2416 \itemmax=\tableindent 2417 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 2418 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 2419 \exdentamount=\tableindent 2420 \parindent = 0pt 2421 \parskip = \smallskipamount 2422 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 2423 \let\item = \internalBitem 2424 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 2425 } 2426 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 2427 \let\Eftable\Etable 2428 \let\Evtable\Etable 2429 \let\Eitemize\Etable 2430 \let\Eenumerate\Etable 2431 2432 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 2433 2434 \newcount \itemno 2435 2436 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 2437 2438 \def\doitemize#1{% 2439 \aboveenvbreak 2440 \itemmax=\itemindent 2441 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 2442 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 2443 \exdentamount=\itemindent 2444 \parindent=0pt 2445 \parskip=\smallskipamount 2446 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 2447 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 2448 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 2449 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 2450 \let\item=\itemizeitem 2451 } 2452 2453 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 2454 % 2455 \def\itemizeitem{% 2456 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 2457 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 2458 {% 2459 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 2460 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 2461 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 2462 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 2463 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 2464 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 2465 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 2466 % that's the theory. 2467 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 2468 \noindent 2469 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 2470 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 2471 \flushcr 2472 } 2473 2474 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 2475 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 2476 % 2477 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 2478 2479 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 2480 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 2481 % argument is the same as `1'. 2482 % 2483 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 2484 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 2485 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 2486 \def\thearg{#1}% 2487 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 2488 % 2489 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 2490 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 2491 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 2492 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 2493 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 2494 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 2495 \ifx\rest\empty 2496 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 2497 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 2498 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 2499 % not equal to itself. 2500 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 2501 % 2502 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 2503 % continuing to look for a <number>. 2504 % 2505 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 2506 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 2507 \else 2508 % It's a letter. 2509 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 2510 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 2511 \else 2512 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 2513 \fi 2514 \fi 2515 \else 2516 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 2517 \numericenumerate 2518 \fi 2519 } 2520 2521 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 2522 % given in \thearg. 2523 % 2524 \def\numericenumerate{% 2525 \itemno = \thearg 2526 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 2527 } 2528 2529 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 2530 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% 2531 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 2532 \startenumeration{% 2533 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 2534 \ifnum\itemno=0 2535 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 2536 alphabet}% 2537 \fi 2538 \char\lccode\itemno 2539 }% 2540 } 2541 2542 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 2543 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% 2544 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 2545 \startenumeration{% 2546 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 2547 \ifnum\itemno=0 2548 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 2549 alphabet} 2550 \fi 2551 \char\uccode\itemno 2552 }% 2553 } 2554 2555 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 2556 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 2557 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 2558 % 2559 \def\startenumeration#1{% 2560 \advance\itemno by -1 2561 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 2562 } 2563 2564 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 2565 % to @enumerate. 2566 % 2567 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 2568 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 2569 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 2570 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 2571 2572 2573 % @multitable macros 2574 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 2575 % 2576 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 2577 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 2578 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 2579 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 2580 2581 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 2582 2583 % To make preamble: 2584 % 2585 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 2586 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 2587 % @item ... 2588 % 2589 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 2590 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 2591 % columns as desired. 2592 2593 2594 % Or use a template: 2595 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 2596 % @item ... 2597 % using the widest term desired in each column. 2598 2599 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 2600 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 2601 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 2602 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 2603 2604 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 2605 % if they are. 2606 2607 % Sample multitable: 2608 2609 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 2610 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 2611 % @item 2612 % first col stuff 2613 % @tab 2614 % second col stuff 2615 % @tab 2616 % third col 2617 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 2618 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 2619 % 2620 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 2621 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 2622 % @end multitable 2623 2624 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. 2625 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 2626 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 2627 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 2628 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 2629 % to baseline. 2630 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 2631 % 2632 \newskip\multitableparskip 2633 \newskip\multitableparindent 2634 \newdimen\multitablecolspace 2635 \newskip\multitablelinespace 2636 \multitableparskip=0pt 2637 \multitableparindent=6pt 2638 \multitablecolspace=12pt 2639 \multitablelinespace=0pt 2640 2641 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: 2642 % 2643 \let\endsetuptable\relax 2644 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 2645 \let\columnfractions\relax 2646 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 2647 \newif\ifsetpercent 2648 2649 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 2650 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 2651 % 2652 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 2653 \global\advance\colcount by 1 2654 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 2655 \setuptable 2656 } 2657 2658 \newcount\colcount 2659 \def\setuptable#1{% 2660 \def\firstarg{#1}% 2661 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 2662 \let\go = \relax 2663 \else 2664 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 2665 \global\setpercenttrue 2666 \else 2667 \ifsetpercent 2668 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 2669 \else 2670 \global\advance\colcount by 1 2671 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 2672 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 2673 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 2674 \fi 2675 \fi 2676 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 2677 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 2678 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 2679 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 2680 \else 2681 \let\go = \setuptable 2682 \fi% 2683 \fi 2684 \go 2685 } 2686 2687 % multitable-only commands. 2688 % 2689 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 2690 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 2691 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. 2692 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% 2693 % 2694 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 2695 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 2696 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. 2697 % --karl, nathan (a] acm.org, 20apr99. 2698 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 2699 2700 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 2701 % 2702 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 2703 % 2704 \envdef\multitable{% 2705 \vskip\parskip 2706 \startsavinginserts 2707 % 2708 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 2709 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 2710 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 2711 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 2712 \def\item{\crcr}% 2713 % 2714 \tolerance=9500 2715 \hbadness=9500 2716 \setmultitablespacing 2717 \parskip=\multitableparskip 2718 \parindent=\multitableparindent 2719 \overfullrule=0pt 2720 \global\colcount=0 2721 % 2722 \everycr = {% 2723 \noalign{% 2724 \global\everytab={}% 2725 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 2726 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 2727 \checkinserts 2728 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 2729 %\filbreak 2730 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 2731 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 2732 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 2733 }% 2734 }% 2735 % 2736 \parsearg\domultitable 2737 } 2738 \def\domultitable#1{% 2739 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 2740 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 2741 % 2742 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 2743 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 2744 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 2745 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 2746 \halign\bgroup &% 2747 \global\advance\colcount by 1 2748 \multistrut 2749 \vtop{% 2750 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 2751 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 2752 % 2753 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 2754 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 2755 % the first one. 2756 % 2757 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 2758 % to the width of each template entry. 2759 % 2760 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 2761 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 2762 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 2763 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 2764 % 2765 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 2766 \rightskip=0pt 2767 \ifnum\colcount=1 2768 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 2769 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 2770 \else 2771 \ifsetpercent \else 2772 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 2773 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 2774 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 2775 \fi 2776 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 2777 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 2778 \fi 2779 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 2780 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 2781 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 2782 % For example: 2783 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 2784 % @item @code{#} 2785 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 2786 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 2787 % marking characters. 2788 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 2789 }\cr 2790 } 2791 \def\Emultitable{% 2792 \crcr 2793 \egroup % end the \halign 2794 \global\setpercentfalse 2795 } 2796 2797 \def\setmultitablespacing{% 2798 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 2799 % 2800 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 2801 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 2802 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 2803 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 2804 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 2805 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 2806 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 2807 \fi 2808 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 2809 %% table. If not, do nothing. 2810 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 2811 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 2812 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 2813 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 2814 %% than skip between lines in the table. 2815 \fi% 2816 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 2817 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 2818 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 2819 %% than skip between lines in the table. 2820 \fi} 2821 2822 2823 \message{conditionals,} 2824 2825 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 2826 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 2827 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 2828 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 2829 % attempt to close an environment group. 2830 % 2831 \def\makecond#1{% 2832 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 2833 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 2834 } 2835 \makecond{iftex} 2836 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} 2837 \makecond{ifnothtml} 2838 \makecond{ifnotinfo} 2839 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} 2840 \makecond{ifnotxml} 2841 2842 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 2843 % 2844 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 2845 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 2846 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 2847 \def\html{\doignore{html}} 2848 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 2849 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 2850 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 2851 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 2852 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 2853 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 2854 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 2855 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 2856 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 2857 2858 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 2859 % 2860 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. 2861 \newcount\doignorecount 2862 2863 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup 2864 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 2865 \catcode`\@ = \other 2866 \catcode`\{ = \other 2867 \catcode`\} = \other 2868 % 2869 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 2870 \spaceisspace 2871 % 2872 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 2873 \doignorecount = 0 2874 % 2875 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 2876 \dodoignore{#1}% 2877 } 2878 2879 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 2880 \obeylines % 2881 % 2882 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 2883 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 2884 % 2885 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line 2886 % by itself. 2887 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 2888 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 2889 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 2890 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 2891 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 2892 % 2893 % And now expand that command. 2894 \obeylines % 2895 \doignoretext ^^M% 2896 }% 2897 } 2898 2899 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% 2900 \def\temp{#1}% 2901 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 2902 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 2903 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 2904 \advance\doignorecount by 1 2905 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 2906 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 2907 \fi 2908 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 2909 } 2910 2911 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 2912 % 2913 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 2914 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 2915 \let\next\enddoignore 2916 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 2917 \advance\doignorecount by -1 2918 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 2919 \fi 2920 \next 2921 } 2922 2923 % Finish off ignored text. 2924 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} 2925 2926 2927 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 2928 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 2929 % 2930 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 2931 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 2932 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 2933 % didn't need it. 2934 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 2935 % 2936 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 2937 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 2938 {% 2939 \makevalueexpandable 2940 \def\temp{#2}% 2941 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 2942 \ifx\temp\empty 2943 \next{}% 2944 \else 2945 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 2946 \fi 2947 }% 2948 } 2949 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 2950 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 2951 2952 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 2953 % 2954 \parseargdef\clear{% 2955 {% 2956 \makevalueexpandable 2957 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 2958 }% 2959 } 2960 2961 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 2962 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 2963 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 2964 { 2965 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 2966 % 2967 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 2968 \let\value = \expandablevalue 2969 % We don't want these characters active, ... 2970 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 2971 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 2972 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 2973 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 2974 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 2975 } 2976 } 2977 2978 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 2979 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 2980 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 2981 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 2982 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 2983 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 2984 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 2985 % 2986 \def\expandablevalue#1{% 2987 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 2988 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 2989 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 2990 \else 2991 \csname SET#1\endcsname 2992 \fi 2993 } 2994 2995 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 2996 % with @set. 2997 % 2998 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 2999 % 3000 \makecond{ifset} 3001 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 3002 \def\doifset#1#2{% 3003 {% 3004 \makevalueexpandable 3005 \let\next=\empty 3006 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 3007 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 3008 \fi 3009 \expandafter 3010 }\next 3011 } 3012 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 3013 3014 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 3015 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 3016 % 3017 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 3018 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 3019 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 3020 % 3021 \makecond{ifclear} 3022 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 3023 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 3024 3025 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 3026 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 3027 \let\dircategory=\comment 3028 3029 % @defininfoenclose. 3030 \let\definfoenclose=\comment 3031 3032 3033 \message{indexing,} 3034 % Index generation facilities 3035 3036 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 3037 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 3038 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 3039 3040 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 3041 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that 3042 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 3043 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 3044 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 3045 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 3046 % for the sake of vms. 3047 % 3048 \def\newindex#1{% 3049 \iflinks 3050 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3051 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 3052 \fi 3053 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 3054 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 3055 } 3056 3057 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 3058 % 3059 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 3060 3061 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 3062 % 3063 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 3064 % 3065 \def\newcodeindex#1{% 3066 \iflinks 3067 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3068 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 3069 \fi 3070 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 3071 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 3072 } 3073 3074 3075 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 3076 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 3077 % 3078 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 3079 % inside @code. 3080 % 3081 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 3082 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 3083 3084 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 3085 % #3 the target index (bar). 3086 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 3087 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 3088 % closing the target index. 3089 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined 3090 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 3091 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 3092 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 3093 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 3094 \fi 3095 % redefine \fooindfile: 3096 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 3097 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 3098 % redefine \fooindex: 3099 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 3100 } 3101 3102 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 3103 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 3104 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. 3105 3106 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 3107 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 3108 3109 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 3110 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 3111 3112 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 3113 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 3114 3115 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 3116 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 3117 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 3118 3119 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 3120 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 3121 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 3122 % 3123 \def\indexdummies{% 3124 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 3125 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 3126 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 3127 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 3128 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 3129 \let\{ = \mylbrace 3130 \let\} = \myrbrace 3131 % 3132 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus 3133 % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control 3134 % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect 3135 % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 3136 % from whatever follows. 3137 % 3138 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 3139 % space. 3140 % 3141 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 3142 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 3143 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 3144 % 3145 \def\definedummyword##1{% 3146 \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}% 3147 }% 3148 \def\definedummyletter##1{% 3149 \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}% 3150 }% 3151 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3152 % 3153 % Do the redefinitions. 3154 \commondummies 3155 } 3156 3157 % For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine 3158 % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses 3159 % @, this will be simpler. 3160 % 3161 \def\atdummies{% 3162 \def\@{@@}% 3163 \def\ {@ }% 3164 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 3165 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 3166 % 3167 % (See comments in \indexdummies.) 3168 \def\definedummyword##1{% 3169 \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}% 3170 }% 3171 \def\definedummyletter##1{% 3172 \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}% 3173 }% 3174 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3175 % 3176 % Do the redefinitions. 3177 \commondummies 3178 } 3179 3180 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and 3181 % \definedummyletter must be defined first. 3182 % 3183 \def\commondummies{% 3184 % 3185 \normalturnoffactive 3186 % 3187 \commondummiesnofonts 3188 % 3189 \definedummyletter{_}% 3190 % 3191 % Non-English letters. 3192 \definedummyword{AA}% 3193 \definedummyword{AE}% 3194 \definedummyword{L}% 3195 \definedummyword{OE}% 3196 \definedummyword{O}% 3197 \definedummyword{aa}% 3198 \definedummyword{ae}% 3199 \definedummyword{l}% 3200 \definedummyword{oe}% 3201 \definedummyword{o}% 3202 \definedummyword{ss}% 3203 \definedummyword{exclamdown}% 3204 \definedummyword{questiondown}% 3205 \definedummyword{ordf}% 3206 \definedummyword{ordm}% 3207 % 3208 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 3209 \definedummyword{bf}% 3210 \definedummyword{gtr}% 3211 \definedummyword{hat}% 3212 \definedummyword{less}% 3213 \definedummyword{sf}% 3214 \definedummyword{sl}% 3215 \definedummyword{tclose}% 3216 \definedummyword{tt}% 3217 % 3218 \definedummyword{LaTeX}% 3219 \definedummyword{TeX}% 3220 % 3221 % Assorted special characters. 3222 \definedummyword{bullet}% 3223 \definedummyword{comma}% 3224 \definedummyword{copyright}% 3225 \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}% 3226 \definedummyword{dots}% 3227 \definedummyword{enddots}% 3228 \definedummyword{equiv}% 3229 \definedummyword{error}% 3230 \definedummyword{euro}% 3231 \definedummyword{expansion}% 3232 \definedummyword{minus}% 3233 \definedummyword{pounds}% 3234 \definedummyword{point}% 3235 \definedummyword{print}% 3236 \definedummyword{result}% 3237 % 3238 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 3239 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 3240 \makevalueexpandable 3241 % 3242 % Normal spaces, not active ones. 3243 \unsepspaces 3244 % 3245 % No macro expansion. 3246 \turnoffmacros 3247 } 3248 3249 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 3250 % 3251 % Better have this without active chars. 3252 { 3253 \catcode`\~=\other 3254 \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{% 3255 % Control letters and accents. 3256 \definedummyletter{!}% 3257 \definedummyaccent{"}% 3258 \definedummyaccent{'}% 3259 \definedummyletter{*}% 3260 \definedummyaccent{,}% 3261 \definedummyletter{.}% 3262 \definedummyletter{/}% 3263 \definedummyletter{:}% 3264 \definedummyaccent{=}% 3265 \definedummyletter{?}% 3266 \definedummyaccent{^}% 3267 \definedummyaccent{`}% 3268 \definedummyaccent{~}% 3269 \definedummyword{u}% 3270 \definedummyword{v}% 3271 \definedummyword{H}% 3272 \definedummyword{dotaccent}% 3273 \definedummyword{ringaccent}% 3274 \definedummyword{tieaccent}% 3275 \definedummyword{ubaraccent}% 3276 \definedummyword{udotaccent}% 3277 \definedummyword{dotless}% 3278 % 3279 % Texinfo font commands. 3280 \definedummyword{b}% 3281 \definedummyword{i}% 3282 \definedummyword{r}% 3283 \definedummyword{sc}% 3284 \definedummyword{t}% 3285 % 3286 % Commands that take arguments. 3287 \definedummyword{acronym}% 3288 \definedummyword{cite}% 3289 \definedummyword{code}% 3290 \definedummyword{command}% 3291 \definedummyword{dfn}% 3292 \definedummyword{emph}% 3293 \definedummyword{env}% 3294 \definedummyword{file}% 3295 \definedummyword{kbd}% 3296 \definedummyword{key}% 3297 \definedummyword{math}% 3298 \definedummyword{option}% 3299 \definedummyword{samp}% 3300 \definedummyword{strong}% 3301 \definedummyword{tie}% 3302 \definedummyword{uref}% 3303 \definedummyword{url}% 3304 \definedummyword{var}% 3305 \definedummyword{verb}% 3306 \definedummyword{w}% 3307 } 3308 } 3309 3310 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 3311 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 3312 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 3313 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). 3314 % 3315 \def\indexnofonts{% 3316 % Accent commands should become @asis. 3317 \def\definedummyaccent##1{% 3318 \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis 3319 }% 3320 % We can just ignore other control letters. 3321 \def\definedummyletter##1{% 3322 \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}% 3323 }% 3324 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 3325 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 3326 % 3327 \commondummiesnofonts 3328 % 3329 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 3330 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 3331 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 3332 %\let\tt=\asis 3333 % 3334 \def\ { }% 3335 \def\@{@}% 3336 % how to handle braces? 3337 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 3338 % 3339 % Non-English letters. 3340 \def\AA{AA}% 3341 \def\AE{AE}% 3342 \def\L{L}% 3343 \def\OE{OE}% 3344 \def\O{O}% 3345 \def\aa{aa}% 3346 \def\ae{ae}% 3347 \def\l{l}% 3348 \def\oe{oe}% 3349 \def\o{o}% 3350 \def\ss{ss}% 3351 \def\exclamdown{!}% 3352 \def\questiondown{?}% 3353 \def\ordf{a}% 3354 \def\ordm{o}% 3355 % 3356 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 3357 \def\TeX{TeX}% 3358 % 3359 % Assorted special characters. 3360 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 3361 \def\bullet{bullet}% 3362 \def\comma{,}% 3363 \def\copyright{copyright}% 3364 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 3365 \def\dots{...}% 3366 \def\enddots{...}% 3367 \def\equiv{==}% 3368 \def\error{error}% 3369 \def\euro{euro}% 3370 \def\expansion{==>}% 3371 \def\minus{-}% 3372 \def\pounds{pounds}% 3373 \def\point{.}% 3374 \def\print{-|}% 3375 \def\result{=>}% 3376 % 3377 % Don't write macro names. 3378 \emptyusermacros 3379 } 3380 3381 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 3382 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 3383 3384 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 3385 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 3386 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 3387 3388 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 3389 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 3390 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 3391 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). 3392 % 3393 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 3394 \iflinks 3395 {% 3396 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 3397 \toks0 = {#2}% 3398 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 3399 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 3400 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 3401 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 3402 \fi 3403 % 3404 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 3405 % 3406 \ifvmode 3407 \dosubindsanitize 3408 \else 3409 \dosubindwrite 3410 \fi 3411 }% 3412 \fi 3413 } 3414 3415 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 3416 % 3417 \def\dosubindwrite{% 3418 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 3419 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 3420 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 3421 \fi 3422 % 3423 % Remember, we are within a group. 3424 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 3425 \escapechar=`\\ 3426 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 3427 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 3428 % 3429 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 3430 % get the string to sort by. 3431 {\indexnofonts 3432 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 3433 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 3434 }% 3435 % 3436 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 3437 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 3438 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 3439 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 3440 % sorted result. 3441 \edef\temp{% 3442 \write\writeto{% 3443 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 3444 }% 3445 \temp 3446 } 3447 3448 % Take care of unwanted page breaks: 3449 % 3450 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 3451 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 3452 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 3453 % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences 3454 % like this: 3455 % @end defun 3456 % @tindex whatever 3457 % @defun ... 3458 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 3459 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 3460 % the previous defun. 3461 % 3462 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 3463 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 3464 % 3465 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 3466 % 3467 % But wait, there is a catch there: 3468 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 3469 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 3470 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 3471 % representation of the skip. 3472 % 3473 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 3474 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 3475 % 3476 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 3477 % 3478 % ..., ready, GO: 3479 % 3480 \def\dosubindsanitize{% 3481 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 3482 \skip0 = \lastskip 3483 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 3484 \count255 = \lastpenalty 3485 % 3486 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 3487 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 3488 % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a 3489 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 3490 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 3491 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 3492 \else 3493 \vskip-\skip0 3494 \fi 3495 % 3496 \dosubindwrite 3497 % 3498 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 3499 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 3500 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 3501 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 3502 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 3503 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 3504 % 3505 % @deffn deffn-whatever 3506 % @vindex index-whatever 3507 % Description. 3508 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 3509 % and the "Description." paragraph. 3510 \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi 3511 \else 3512 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 3513 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 3514 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 3515 \nobreak\vskip\skip0 3516 \fi 3517 } 3518 3519 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like 3520 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 3521 % or 3522 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 3523 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 3524 % containing these kinds of lines: 3525 % \initial {c} 3526 % before the first topic whose initial is c 3527 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} 3528 % for a topic that is used without subtopics 3529 % \primary {topic} 3530 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 3531 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 3532 % for each subtopic. 3533 3534 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands 3535 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 3536 3537 \def\findex {\fnindex} 3538 \def\kindex {\kyindex} 3539 \def\cindex {\cpindex} 3540 \def\vindex {\vrindex} 3541 \def\tindex {\tpindex} 3542 \def\pindex {\pgindex} 3543 3544 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 3545 {\obeylines % 3546 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 3547 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 3548 3549 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 3550 3551 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 3552 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 3553 % 3554 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 3555 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 3556 % 3557 \smallfonts \rm 3558 \tolerance = 9500 3559 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 3560 % 3561 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 3562 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 3563 % \initial {@} 3564 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 3565 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 3566 \catcode`\@ = 11 3567 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 3568 \ifeof 1 3569 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 3570 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 3571 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 3572 % there is some text. 3573 \putwordIndexNonexistent 3574 \else 3575 % 3576 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 3577 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 3578 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 3579 \read 1 to \temp 3580 \ifeof 1 3581 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 3582 \else 3583 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 3584 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 3585 % to make right now. 3586 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 3587 \catcode`\\ = 0 3588 \escapechar = `\\ 3589 \begindoublecolumns 3590 \input \jobname.#1s 3591 \enddoublecolumns 3592 \fi 3593 \fi 3594 \closein 1 3595 \endgroup} 3596 3597 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 3598 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. 3599 3600 \def\initial#1{{% 3601 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 3602 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 3603 % 3604 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 3605 \removelastskip 3606 % 3607 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 3608 \nobreak 3609 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 3610 \penalty 0 3611 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 3612 % 3613 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 3614 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 3615 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 3616 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 3617 % 3618 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 3619 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 3620 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 3621 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 3622 \nobreak 3623 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 3624 }} 3625 3626 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 3627 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 3628 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 3629 % 3630 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: 3631 % \def\entry#1#2{... 3632 % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 3633 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 3634 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 3635 % 3636 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 3637 % --kasal, 21nov03 3638 \def\entry{% 3639 \begingroup 3640 % 3641 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 3642 % affect previous text. 3643 \par 3644 % 3645 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 3646 \parfillskip = 0in 3647 % 3648 % No extra space above this paragraph. 3649 \parskip = 0in 3650 % 3651 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 3652 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 3653 % 3654 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 3655 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 3656 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 3657 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 3658 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 3659 % 3660 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 3661 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 3662 \hangindent = 2em 3663 % 3664 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 3665 % with blank space. 3666 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 3667 % 3668 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 3669 % columns. 3670 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 3671 % 3672 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 3673 \afterassignment\doentry 3674 \let\temp = 3675 } 3676 \def\doentry{% 3677 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 3678 \noindent 3679 \aftergroup\finishentry 3680 % And now comes the text of the entry. 3681 } 3682 \def\finishentry#1{% 3683 % #1 is the page number. 3684 % 3685 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 3686 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 3687 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 3688 \def\tempa{{\rm }}% 3689 \def\tempb{#1}% 3690 \edef\tempc{\tempa}% 3691 \edef\tempd{\tempb}% 3692 \ifx\tempc\tempd 3693 \ % 3694 \else 3695 % 3696 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 3697 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 3698 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 3699 \hfil\penalty50 3700 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 3701 % 3702 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 3703 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 3704 % \hbox ensues. 3705 \ifpdf 3706 \pdfgettoks#1.% 3707 \ \the\toksA 3708 \else 3709 \ #1% 3710 \fi 3711 \fi 3712 \par 3713 \endgroup 3714 } 3715 3716 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. 3717 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 3718 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 3719 3720 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 3721 3722 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 3723 \def\secondary#1#2{{% 3724 \parfillskip=0in 3725 \parskip=0in 3726 \hangindent=1in 3727 \hangafter=1 3728 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 3729 \ifpdf 3730 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 3731 \else 3732 #2 3733 \fi 3734 \par 3735 }} 3736 3737 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 3738 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 3739 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 3740 \catcode`\@=11 3741 3742 \newbox\partialpage 3743 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 3744 3745 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 3746 % Grab any single-column material above us. 3747 \output = {% 3748 % 3749 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 3750 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 3751 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 3752 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 3753 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 3754 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 3755 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 3756 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 3757 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 3758 \fi 3759 % 3760 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 3761 % Unvbox the main output page. 3762 \unvbox\PAGE 3763 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 3764 }% 3765 }% 3766 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 3767 % 3768 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 3769 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 3770 % 3771 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 3772 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 3773 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 3774 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 3775 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 3776 % 3777 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 3778 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 3779 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 3780 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 3781 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 3782 % 3783 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 3784 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 3785 % been clobbered. 3786 % 3787 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 3788 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 3789 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 3790 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 3791 % 3792 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 3793 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 3794 \vsize = 2\vsize 3795 } 3796 3797 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 3798 % the last. 3799 % 3800 \def\doublecolumnout{% 3801 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 3802 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 3803 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 3804 % previous page. 3805 \dimen@ = \vsize 3806 \divide\dimen@ by 2 3807 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 3808 % 3809 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 3810 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 3811 \onepageout\pagesofar 3812 \unvbox255 3813 \penalty\outputpenalty 3814 } 3815 % 3816 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 3817 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 3818 \def\pagesofar{% 3819 \unvbox\partialpage 3820 % 3821 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 3822 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 3823 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 3824 } 3825 % 3826 % All done with double columns. 3827 \def\enddoublecolumns{% 3828 \output = {% 3829 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 3830 % current page, no automatic page break. 3831 \balancecolumns 3832 % 3833 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 3834 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 3835 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 3836 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 3837 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 3838 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 3839 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 3840 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 3841 }% 3842 \eject 3843 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 3844 % 3845 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 3846 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 3847 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 3848 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 3849 \pagegoal = \vsize 3850 } 3851 % 3852 % Called at the end of the double column material. 3853 \def\balancecolumns{% 3854 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 3855 \dimen@ = \ht0 3856 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 3857 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 3858 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 3859 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 3860 \splittopskip = \topskip 3861 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 3862 {% 3863 \vbadness = 10000 3864 \loop 3865 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 3866 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 3867 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 3868 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 3869 \repeat 3870 }% 3871 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 3872 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 3873 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 3874 % 3875 \pagesofar 3876 } 3877 \catcode`\@ = \other 3878 3879 3880 \message{sectioning,} 3881 % Chapters, sections, etc. 3882 3883 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 3884 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 3885 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 3886 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 3887 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 3888 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 3889 \newcount\chapno 3890 \newcount\secno \secno=0 3891 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 3892 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 3893 3894 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 3895 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 3896 % 3897 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 3898 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 3899 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 3900 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 3901 % 3902 \def\appendixletter{% 3903 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 3904 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 3905 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 3906 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 3907 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 3908 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 3909 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 3910 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 3911 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 3912 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 3913 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 3914 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 3915 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 3916 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 3917 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 3918 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 3919 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 3920 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 3921 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 3922 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 3923 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 3924 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 3925 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 3926 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 3927 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 3928 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 3929 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 3930 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 3931 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 3932 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 3933 \else\char\the\appendixno 3934 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 3935 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 3936 3937 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. 3938 % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. 3939 % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. 3940 \def\thischapter{} 3941 \def\thissection{} 3942 3943 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 3944 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 3945 3946 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 3947 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 3948 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 3949 3950 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 3951 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 3952 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 3953 3954 % we only have subsub. 3955 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 3956 % 3957 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 3958 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 3959 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 3960 % 3961 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 3962 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 3963 \def\chapheadtype{N} 3964 3965 % Choose a heading macro 3966 % #1 is heading type 3967 % #2 is heading level 3968 % #3 is text for heading 3969 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% 3970 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 3971 \absseclevel=#2 3972 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 3973 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 3974 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 3975 \absseclevel = 0 3976 \else 3977 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 3978 \absseclevel = 3 3979 \fi 3980 \fi 3981 % The heading type: 3982 \def\headtype{#1}% 3983 \if \headtype U% 3984 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 3985 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 3986 \fi 3987 \else 3988 % Check for appendix sections: 3989 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 3990 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 3991 \else 3992 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 3993 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 3994 \fi\fi 3995 \fi 3996 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 3997 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 3998 \def\headtype{U}% 3999 \else 4000 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 4001 \fi 4002 \fi 4003 % Now print the heading: 4004 \if \headtype U% 4005 \ifcase\absseclevel 4006 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 4007 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 4008 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4009 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4010 \fi 4011 \else 4012 \if \headtype A% 4013 \ifcase\absseclevel 4014 \appendixzzz{#3}% 4015 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 4016 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 4017 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4018 \fi 4019 \else 4020 \ifcase\absseclevel 4021 \chapterzzz{#3}% 4022 \or \seczzz{#3}% 4023 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4024 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4025 \fi 4026 \fi 4027 \fi 4028 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4029 } 4030 4031 % an interface: 4032 \def\numhead{\genhead N} 4033 \def\apphead{\genhead A} 4034 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 4035 4036 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 4037 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 4038 % 4039 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 4040 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 4041 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4042 % 4043 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 4044 \def\chapterzzz#1{% 4045 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 4046 % as an @include file. 4047 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4048 \global\advance\chapno by 1 4049 % 4050 % Used for \float. 4051 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 4052 \resetallfloatnos 4053 % 4054 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% 4055 % 4056 % Write the actual heading. 4057 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 4058 % 4059 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 4060 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 4061 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4062 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4063 } 4064 4065 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz 4066 \def\appendixzzz#1{% 4067 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4068 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 4069 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 4070 \resetallfloatnos 4071 % 4072 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% 4073 \message{\appendixnum}% 4074 % 4075 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 4076 % 4077 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 4078 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 4079 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 4080 } 4081 4082 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 4083 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 4084 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4085 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 4086 % 4087 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 4088 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4089 \resetallfloatnos 4090 % 4091 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 4092 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 4093 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 4094 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 4095 % to be executed, not expanded). 4096 % 4097 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 4098 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 4099 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 4100 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 4101 % the toc entries.) 4102 \toks0 = {#1}% 4103 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 4104 % 4105 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 4106 % 4107 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 4108 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 4109 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 4110 } 4111 4112 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 4113 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 4114 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 4115 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 4116 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 4117 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 4118 \unnmhead0{#1}% 4119 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4120 } 4121 4122 % @top is like @unnumbered. 4123 \let\top\unnumbered 4124 4125 % Sections. 4126 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 4127 \def\seczzz#1{% 4128 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4129 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 4130 } 4131 4132 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 4133 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 4134 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4135 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 4136 } 4137 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection 4138 4139 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 4140 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 4141 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4142 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 4143 } 4144 4145 % Subsections. 4146 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 4147 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 4148 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4149 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4150 } 4151 4152 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 4153 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 4154 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4155 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 4156 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4157 } 4158 4159 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 4160 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 4161 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4162 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 4163 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4164 } 4165 4166 % Subsubsections. 4167 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 4168 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 4169 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 4170 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 4171 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 4172 } 4173 4174 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 4175 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 4176 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 4177 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 4178 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 4179 } 4180 4181 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 4182 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 4183 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 4184 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 4185 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 4186 } 4187 4188 % These macros control what the section commands do, according 4189 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 4190 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 4191 \let\section = \numberedsec 4192 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4193 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4194 4195 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 4196 4197 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 4198 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 4199 % overlong headings to fold. 4200 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 4201 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 4202 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 4203 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 4204 4205 4206 \def\majorheading{% 4207 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 4208 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 4209 } 4210 4211 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 4212 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 4213 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 4214 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 4215 \rm #1\hfill}}% 4216 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 4217 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4218 } 4219 4220 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 4221 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 4222 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 4223 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 4224 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 4225 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 4226 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 4227 4228 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 4229 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 4230 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 4231 4232 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 4233 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 4234 4235 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 4236 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 4237 4238 \newskip\chapheadingskip 4239 4240 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 4241 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 4242 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} 4243 4244 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 4245 4246 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% 4247 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 4248 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 4249 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 4250 4251 \def\CHAPPAGon{% 4252 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 4253 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 4254 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 4255 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 4256 4257 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% 4258 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 4259 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 4260 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 4261 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 4262 4263 \CHAPPAGon 4264 4265 % Chapter opening. 4266 % 4267 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 4268 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 4269 % 4270 % To test against our argument. 4271 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 4272 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 4273 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 4274 % 4275 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 4276 \pchapsepmacro 4277 {% 4278 \chapfonts \rm 4279 % 4280 % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the 4281 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 4282 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 4283 \gdef\thissection{#1}% 4284 \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% 4285 % 4286 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 4287 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 4288 \def\temptype{#2}% 4289 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 4290 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 4291 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 4292 \def\thischapter{#1}% 4293 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 4294 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 4295 \def\toctype{omit}% 4296 \xdef\thischapter{}% 4297 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 4298 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 4299 \def\toctype{app}% 4300 % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter 4301 % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't 4302 % use \thissection because that changes with each section. 4303 % 4304 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: 4305 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 4306 \else 4307 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 4308 \def\toctype{numchap}% 4309 \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: 4310 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 4311 \fi\fi\fi 4312 % 4313 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 4314 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 4315 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 4316 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 4317 % 4318 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 4319 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 4320 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 4321 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 4322 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 4323 \donoderef{#2}% 4324 % 4325 % Typeset the actual heading. 4326 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 4327 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 4328 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 4329 }% 4330 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 4331 \nobreak 4332 } 4333 4334 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 4335 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4336 \def\centerparameters{% 4337 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 4338 \leftskip = \rightskip 4339 \parfillskip = 0pt 4340 } 4341 4342 4343 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 4344 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 4345 % 4346 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 4347 % 4348 \def\unnchfopen #1{% 4349 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 4350 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 4351 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 4352 } 4353 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 4354 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 4355 \par\penalty 5000 % 4356 } 4357 \def\centerchfopen #1{% 4358 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 4359 \parindent=0pt 4360 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 4361 } 4362 \def\CHAPFopen{% 4363 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 4364 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 4365 4366 4367 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 4368 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 4369 % 4370 \newskip\secheadingskip 4371 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 4372 4373 % Subsection titles. 4374 \newskip\subsecheadingskip 4375 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 4376 4377 % Subsubsection titles. 4378 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 4379 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 4380 4381 4382 % Print any size, any type, section title. 4383 % 4384 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 4385 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 4386 % section number. 4387 % 4388 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 4389 {% 4390 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 4391 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 4392 % 4393 % Insert space above the heading. 4394 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 4395 % 4396 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 4397 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 4398 \def\temptype{#3}% 4399 % 4400 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 4401 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 4402 \def\toctype{unn}% 4403 \gdef\thissection{#1}% 4404 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 4405 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 4406 % and don't redefine \thissection. 4407 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 4408 \def\toctype{omit}% 4409 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 4410 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 4411 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 4412 \def\toctype{app}% 4413 \gdef\thissection{#1}% 4414 \else 4415 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 4416 \def\toctype{num}% 4417 \gdef\thissection{#1}% 4418 \fi\fi\fi 4419 % 4420 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain. 4421 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 4422 % 4423 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 4424 % Again, see comments in \chfplain. 4425 \donoderef{#3}% 4426 % 4427 % Output the actual section heading. 4428 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 4429 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 4430 \unhbox0 #1}% 4431 }% 4432 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 4433 % Don't allow stretch, though. 4434 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 4435 % 4436 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 4437 % was followed by glue. 4438 \nobreak 4439 % 4440 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 4441 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 4442 % discardable item.) 4443 \vskip-\parskip 4444 % 4445 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 4446 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 4447 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 4448 % 4449 % @section sec-whatever 4450 % @deffn def-whatever 4451 \penalty 10001 4452 } 4453 4454 4455 \message{toc,} 4456 % Table of contents. 4457 \newwrite\tocfile 4458 4459 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 4460 % Called from @chapter, etc. 4461 % 4462 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 4463 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 4464 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 4465 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 4466 % destination to jump to. 4467 % 4468 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 4469 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 4470 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 4471 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. 4472 % 4473 \newif\iftocfileopened 4474 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% 4475 % 4476 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 4477 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 4478 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 4479 \iftocfileopened\else 4480 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 4481 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 4482 \fi 4483 % 4484 \iflinks 4485 \toks0 = {#2}% 4486 \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}% 4487 \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}% 4488 {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 4489 \temp 4490 \fi 4491 \fi 4492 % 4493 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 4494 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 4495 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 4496 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 4497 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 4498 % `1', and two named `2'. 4499 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 4500 } 4501 4502 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 4503 \newcount\savepageno 4504 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 4505 4506 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 4507 % 4508 \def\startcontents#1{% 4509 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 4510 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 4511 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 4512 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege (a] matematik.su.se> 4513 \contentsalignmacro 4514 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 4515 % 4516 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 4517 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 4518 \def\thischapter{}% 4519 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 4520 % 4521 \savepageno = \pageno 4522 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 4523 \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 4524 % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section 4525 % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. 4526 %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha (a] piuha.ydi.vtt.fi 4527 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 4528 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 4529 % 4530 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 4531 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 4532 } 4533 4534 4535 % Normal (long) toc. 4536 \def\contents{% 4537 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 4538 \openin 1 \jobname.toc 4539 \ifeof 1 \else 4540 \input \jobname.toc 4541 \fi 4542 \vfill \eject 4543 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 4544 \ifeof 1 \else 4545 \pdfmakeoutlines 4546 \fi 4547 \closein 1 4548 \endgroup 4549 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 4550 \global\pageno = \savepageno 4551 } 4552 4553 % And just the chapters. 4554 \def\summarycontents{% 4555 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 4556 % 4557 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 4558 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 4559 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 4560 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 4561 \secfonts 4562 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 4563 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 4564 \rm 4565 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 4566 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 4567 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 4568 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 4569 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 4570 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4571 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4572 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4573 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4574 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4575 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 4576 \openin 1 \jobname.toc 4577 \ifeof 1 \else 4578 \input \jobname.toc 4579 \fi 4580 \closein 1 4581 \vfill \eject 4582 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 4583 \endgroup 4584 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 4585 \global\pageno = \savepageno 4586 } 4587 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 4588 4589 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 4590 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 4591 % 4592 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% 4593 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 4594 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 4595 % But use \hss just in case. 4596 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 4597 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 4598 % 4599 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 4600 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 4601 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 4602 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 4603 % there are before deciding ... 4604 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 4605 } 4606 4607 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 4608 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. 4609 % The last argument is the page number. 4610 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 4611 4612 % Chapters, in the main contents. 4613 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 4614 % 4615 % Chapters, in the short toc. 4616 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 4617 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 4618 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 4619 } 4620 4621 % Appendices, in the main contents. 4622 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 4623 % 4624 \def\appendixbox#1{% 4625 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 4626 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 4627 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 4628 % 4629 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 4630 4631 % Unnumbered chapters. 4632 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 4633 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 4634 4635 % Sections. 4636 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 4637 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 4638 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 4639 4640 % Subsections. 4641 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 4642 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 4643 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 4644 4645 % And subsubsections. 4646 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 4647 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 4648 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 4649 4650 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 4651 % Same as \defaultparindent. 4652 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 4653 4654 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 4655 % page number. 4656 % 4657 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 4658 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 4659 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% 4660 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 4661 \begingroup 4662 \chapentryfonts 4663 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 4664 \endgroup 4665 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 4666 } 4667 4668 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 4669 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 4670 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 4671 \endgroup} 4672 4673 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 4674 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 4675 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 4676 \endgroup} 4677 4678 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 4679 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 4680 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 4681 \endgroup} 4682 4683 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 4684 \let\tocentry = \entry 4685 4686 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 4687 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 4688 4689 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 4690 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 4691 4692 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 4693 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 4694 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 4695 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 4696 4697 4698 \message{environments,} 4699 % @foo ... @end foo. 4700 4701 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 4702 % 4703 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of 4704 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 4705 % 4706 \def\point{$\star$} 4707 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 4708 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 4709 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 4710 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 4711 4712 % The @error{} command. 4713 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 4714 % 4715 \newbox\errorbox 4716 % 4717 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 4718 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 4719 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 4720 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} 4721 % 4722 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 4723 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 4724 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 4725 \vbox{% 4726 \hrule height\dimen2 4727 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 4728 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 4729 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 4730 \hrule height\dimen2} 4731 \hfil} 4732 % 4733 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 4734 4735 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 4736 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 4737 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 4738 4739 \envdef\tex{% 4740 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 4741 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 4742 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 4743 \catcode `\%=14 4744 \catcode `\+=\other 4745 \catcode `\"=\other 4746 \catcode `\|=\other 4747 \catcode `\<=\other 4748 \catcode `\>=\other 4749 \escapechar=`\\ 4750 % 4751 \let\b=\ptexb 4752 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 4753 \let\c=\ptexc 4754 \let\,=\ptexcomma 4755 \let\.=\ptexdot 4756 \let\dots=\ptexdots 4757 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 4758 \let\!=\ptexexclam 4759 \let\i=\ptexi 4760 \let\indent=\ptexindent 4761 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 4762 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 4763 \let\+=\tabalign 4764 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 4765 \let\/=\ptexslash 4766 \let\*=\ptexstar 4767 \let\t=\ptext 4768 % 4769 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 4770 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 4771 \def\@{@}% 4772 } 4773 % There is no need to define \Etex. 4774 4775 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 4776 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 4777 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 4778 4779 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 4780 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 4781 4782 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 4783 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 4784 % have any width. 4785 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 4786 4787 % This space is always present above and below environments. 4788 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 4789 4790 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 4791 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 4792 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 4793 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 4794 % 4795 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% 4796 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 4797 % \sectionheading, q.v. 4798 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 4799 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 4800 \endgraf 4801 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 4802 \removelastskip 4803 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 4804 % or better ... 4805 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 4806 \vskip\envskipamount 4807 \fi 4808 \fi 4809 }} 4810 4811 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 4812 4813 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. 4814 \let\nonarrowing=\relax 4815 4816 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 4817 % environment contents. 4818 \font\circle=lcircle10 4819 \newdimen\circthick 4820 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 4821 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 4822 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 4823 % 4824 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 4825 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 4826 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 4827 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 4828 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 4829 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 4830 \hskip\rskip}} 4831 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 4832 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 4833 \hskip\rskip}} 4834 % 4835 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 4836 4837 \envdef\cartouche{% 4838 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 4839 \startsavinginserts 4840 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 4841 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 4842 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 4843 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 4844 \cartouter=\hsize 4845 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 4846 % side, and for 6pt waste from 4847 % each corner char, and rule thickness 4848 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 4849 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 4850 \let\nonarrowing=\comment 4851 \vbox\bgroup 4852 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 4853 \carttop 4854 \hbox\bgroup 4855 \hskip\lskip 4856 \vrule\kern3pt 4857 \vbox\bgroup 4858 \kern3pt 4859 \hsize=\cartinner 4860 \baselineskip=\normbskip 4861 \lineskip=\normlskip 4862 \parskip=\normpskip 4863 \vskip -\parskip 4864 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 4865 } 4866 \def\Ecartouche{% 4867 \ifhmode\par\fi 4868 \kern3pt 4869 \egroup 4870 \kern3pt\vrule 4871 \hskip\rskip 4872 \egroup 4873 \cartbot 4874 \egroup 4875 \checkinserts 4876 } 4877 4878 4879 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 4880 % inside a group. 4881 \def\nonfillstart{% 4882 \aboveenvbreak 4883 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 4884 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 4885 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 4886 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 4887 \parskip = 0pt 4888 \parindent = 0pt 4889 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 4890 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing 4891 % at next level down. 4892 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 4893 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 4894 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 4895 \fi 4896 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 4897 } 4898 4899 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 4900 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 4901 % This affects the following displayed environments: 4902 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp 4903 % 4904 \def\smallword{small} 4905 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} 4906 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax 4907 \def\setnormaldispenv{% 4908 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 4909 \smallexamplefonts \rm 4910 \fi 4911 } 4912 \def\setsmalldispenv{% 4913 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 4914 \else 4915 \smallexamplefonts \rm 4916 \fi 4917 } 4918 4919 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 4920 % Let's do it by one command: 4921 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ 4922 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 4923 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 4924 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 4925 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 4926 } 4927 4928 % Define two synonyms: 4929 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 4930 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 4931 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 4932 } 4933 4934 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 4935 % 4936 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 4937 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 4938 % 4939 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 4940 \nonfillstart 4941 \tt 4942 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 4943 \gobble % eat return 4944 } 4945 4946 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 4947 % 4948 \makedispenv {display}{% 4949 \nonfillstart 4950 \gobble 4951 } 4952 4953 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 4954 % 4955 \makedispenv{format}{% 4956 \let\nonarrowing = t% 4957 \nonfillstart 4958 \gobble 4959 } 4960 4961 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 4962 \envdef\flushleft{% 4963 \let\nonarrowing = t% 4964 \nonfillstart 4965 \gobble 4966 } 4967 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 4968 4969 % @flushright. 4970 % 4971 \envdef\flushright{% 4972 \let\nonarrowing = t% 4973 \nonfillstart 4974 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 4975 \gobble 4976 } 4977 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 4978 4979 4980 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 4981 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 4982 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 4983 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 4984 % 4985 \envdef\quotation{% 4986 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 4987 \parindent=0pt 4988 % 4989 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 4990 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 4991 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 4992 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 4993 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 4994 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 4995 \fi 4996 \parsearg\quotationlabel 4997 } 4998 4999 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 5000 % doing normal filling. 5001 % 5002 \def\Equotation{% 5003 \par 5004 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 5005 % indent a bit. 5006 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 5007 \fi 5008 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 5009 } 5010 5011 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 5012 \def\quotationlabel#1{% 5013 \def\temp{#1}% 5014 \ifx\temp\empty \else 5015 {\bf #1: }% 5016 \fi 5017 } 5018 5019 5020 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 5021 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 5022 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 5023 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke (a] gnu.org 5024 % 5025 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 5026 % 5027 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 5028 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 5029 % verbatim line. 5030 \def\dospecials{% 5031 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 5032 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 5033 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 5034 } 5035 % 5036 % [Knuth] p. 380 5037 \def\uncatcodespecials{% 5038 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 5039 % 5040 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 5041 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font 5042 \begingroup 5043 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} 5044 \endgroup 5045 % 5046 % Setup for the @verb command. 5047 % 5048 % Eight spaces for a tab 5049 \begingroup 5050 \catcode`\^^I=\active 5051 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 5052 \endgroup 5053 % 5054 \def\setupverb{% 5055 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 5056 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 5057 \catcode`\`=\active 5058 \tabeightspaces 5059 % Respect line breaks, 5060 % print special symbols as themselves, and 5061 % make each space count 5062 % must do in this order: 5063 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 5064 } 5065 5066 % Setup for the @verbatim environment 5067 % 5068 % Real tab expansion 5069 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 5070 % 5071 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 5072 \begingroup 5073 \catcode`\^^I=\active 5074 \gdef\tabexpand{% 5075 \catcode`\^^I=\active 5076 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 5077 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 5078 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 5079 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 5080 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 5081 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 5082 }% 5083 } 5084 \endgroup 5085 \def\setupverbatim{% 5086 \nonfillstart 5087 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 5088 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 5089 \tt 5090 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 5091 \catcode`\`=\active 5092 \tabexpand 5093 % Respect line breaks, 5094 % print special symbols as themselves, and 5095 % make each space count 5096 % must do in this order: 5097 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 5098 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 5099 } 5100 5101 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 5102 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 5103 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 5104 % 5105 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 5106 % 5107 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 5108 \begingroup 5109 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 5110 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 5111 \endgroup 5112 % 5113 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 5114 % 5115 % 5116 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 5117 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 5118 % 5119 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 5120 % 5121 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 5122 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 5123 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 5124 % 5125 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 5126 % 5127 \begingroup 5128 \catcode`\ =\active 5129 \obeylines % 5130 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 5131 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 5132 % line in the output. 5133 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 5134 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 5135 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 5136 \endgroup 5137 % 5138 \envdef\verbatim{% 5139 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 5140 } 5141 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 5142 5143 5144 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 5145 % 5146 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 5147 % 5148 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 5149 {% 5150 \makevalueexpandable 5151 \setupverbatim 5152 \input #1 5153 \afterenvbreak 5154 }% 5155 } 5156 5157 % @copying ... @end copying. 5158 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 5159 % 5160 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 5161 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 5162 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 5163 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 5164 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 5165 % possible is very desirable. 5166 % 5167 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 5168 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 5169 % 5170 \def\insertcopying{% 5171 \begingroup 5172 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 5173 \scanexp\copyingtext 5174 \endgroup 5175 } 5176 5177 \message{defuns,} 5178 % @defun etc. 5179 5180 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 5181 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 5182 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 5183 5184 % Start the processing of @deffn: 5185 \def\startdefun{% 5186 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 5187 \medbreak 5188 \else 5189 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 5190 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 5191 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 5192 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 5193 % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 5194 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 5195 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 5196 % 5197 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi 5198 % 5199 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 5200 % But do insert the glue. 5201 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 5202 \fi 5203 % 5204 \parindent=0in 5205 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 5206 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 5207 } 5208 5209 \def\dodefunx#1{% 5210 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 5211 \checkenv#1% 5212 % 5213 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 5214 % It's not a great place, though. 5215 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi 5216 % 5217 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 5218 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 5219 } 5220 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 5221 5222 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 5223 % 5224 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% 5225 \begingroup 5226 % call \deffnheader: 5227 #1#2 \endheader 5228 % common ending: 5229 \interlinepenalty = 10000 5230 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5231 \endgraf 5232 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 5233 \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 5234 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 5235 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 5236 \checkparencounts 5237 \endgroup 5238 } 5239 5240 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 5241 5242 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 5243 % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. 5244 % 5245 \def\makedefun#1{% 5246 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 5247 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 5248 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 5249 \temp 5250 } 5251 5252 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 5253 % 5254 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 5255 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 5256 % 5257 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 5258 \envdef#1{% 5259 \startdefun 5260 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 5261 }% 5262 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 5263 \def#3% 5264 } 5265 5266 %%% Untyped functions: 5267 5268 % @deffn category name args 5269 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 5270 5271 % @deffn category class name args 5272 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 5273 5274 % \defopon {category on}class name args 5275 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 5276 5277 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 5278 % 5279 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 5280 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 5281 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 5282 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 5283 } 5284 5285 %%% Typed functions: 5286 5287 % @deftypefn category type name args 5288 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 5289 5290 % @deftypeop category class type name args 5291 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 5292 5293 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 5294 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 5295 5296 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 5297 % 5298 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 5299 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 5300 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 5301 } 5302 5303 %%% Typed variables: 5304 5305 % @deftypevr category type var args 5306 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 5307 5308 % @deftypecv category class type var args 5309 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 5310 5311 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 5312 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 5313 5314 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 5315 % 5316 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 5317 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 5318 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 5319 } 5320 5321 %%% Untyped variables: 5322 5323 % @defvr category var args 5324 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 5325 5326 % @defcv category class var args 5327 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 5328 5329 % \defcvof {category of}class var args 5330 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 5331 5332 %%% Type: 5333 % @deftp category name args 5334 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 5335 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 5336 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 5337 } 5338 5339 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 5340 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 5341 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 5342 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 5343 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 5344 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 5345 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 5346 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 5347 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 5348 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 5349 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 5350 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 5351 5352 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 5353 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". 5354 % #2 is the return type, if any. 5355 % #3 is the function name. 5356 % 5357 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 5358 % 5359 \def\defname#1#2#3{% 5360 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 5361 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 5362 % 5363 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 5364 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 5365 % just below it. 5366 \def\temp{#1}% 5367 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 5368 % 5369 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 5370 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 5371 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 5372 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 5373 % The continuations: 5374 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 5375 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 5376 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 5377 % 5378 % Put the type name to the right margin. 5379 \noindent 5380 \hbox to 0pt{% 5381 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 5382 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 5383 \kern\leftskip 5384 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 5385 }% 5386 % 5387 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 5388 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 5389 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 5390 {% 5391 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 5392 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 5393 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 5394 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 5395 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 5396 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 5397 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 5398 % one has made identifiers using them :). 5399 \df \tt 5400 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 5401 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 5402 #3% output function name 5403 }% 5404 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 5405 % 5406 \boldbrax 5407 % arguments will be output next, if any. 5408 } 5409 5410 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 5411 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 5412 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 5413 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 5414 % 5415 \def\defunargs#1{% 5416 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 5417 % tt for the names. 5418 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 5419 % 5420 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 5421 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 5422 \let\var=\ttslanted 5423 #1% 5424 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 5425 } 5426 5427 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 5428 % 5429 \def\activeparens{% 5430 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 5431 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 5432 \catcode`\&=\active 5433 } 5434 5435 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 5436 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 5437 5438 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 5439 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 5440 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 5441 { 5442 \activeparens 5443 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 5444 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 5445 \global\let& = \& 5446 5447 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 5448 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 5449 } 5450 5451 \newcount\parencount 5452 5453 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 5454 \newif\ifampseen 5455 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 5456 5457 \def\parenfont{% 5458 \ifampseen 5459 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 5460 % otherwise use the default font. 5461 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 5462 \else 5463 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 5464 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 5465 \sf 5466 \fi 5467 } 5468 \def\infirstlevel#1{% 5469 \ifampseen 5470 \ifnum\parencount=1 5471 #1% 5472 \fi 5473 \fi 5474 } 5475 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 5476 5477 \def\opnr{% 5478 \global\advance\parencount by 1 5479 {\parenfont(}% 5480 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 5481 } 5482 \def\clnr{% 5483 {\parenfont)}% 5484 \infirstlevel \sl 5485 \global\advance\parencount by -1 5486 } 5487 5488 \newcount\brackcount 5489 \def\lbrb{% 5490 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 5491 {\bf[}% 5492 } 5493 \def\rbrb{% 5494 {\bf]}% 5495 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 5496 } 5497 5498 \def\checkparencounts{% 5499 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 5500 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 5501 } 5502 \def\badparencount{% 5503 \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% 5504 \global\parencount=0 5505 } 5506 \def\badbrackcount{% 5507 \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% 5508 \global\brackcount=0 5509 } 5510 5511 5512 \message{macros,} 5513 % @macro. 5514 5515 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 5516 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 5517 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 5518 \newwrite\macscribble 5519 \def\scantokens#1{% 5520 \toks0={#1}% 5521 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 5522 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 5523 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 5524 \input \jobname.tmp 5525 } 5526 \fi 5527 5528 \def\scanmacro#1{% 5529 \begingroup 5530 \newlinechar`\^^M 5531 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 5532 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 5533 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 5534 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 5535 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 5536 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 5537 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 5538 % ... and \example 5539 \spaceisspace 5540 % 5541 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 5542 % 5543 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 5544 % --kasal, 29nov03 5545 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 5546 \endgroup 5547 } 5548 5549 \def\scanexp#1{% 5550 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 5551 \temp 5552 } 5553 5554 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 5555 \newtoks\macname % Macro name 5556 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 5557 \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form 5558 % \do\macro1\do\macro2... 5559 5560 % Utility routines. 5561 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 5562 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 5563 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). 5564 % 5565 \def\cslet#1#2{% 5566 \expandafter\let 5567 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 5568 \csname#2\endcsname 5569 } 5570 5571 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 5572 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 5573 {\catcode`\@=11 5574 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 5575 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 5576 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 5577 \def\unbrace#1{#1} 5578 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 5579 } 5580 5581 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 5582 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 5583 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 5584 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 5585 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 5586 } 5587 5588 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 5589 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 5590 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 5591 5592 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 5593 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 5594 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 5595 5596 \def\scanctxt{% 5597 \catcode`\"=\other 5598 \catcode`\+=\other 5599 \catcode`\<=\other 5600 \catcode`\>=\other 5601 \catcode`\@=\other 5602 \catcode`\^=\other 5603 \catcode`\_=\other 5604 \catcode`\|=\other 5605 \catcode`\~=\other 5606 } 5607 5608 \def\scanargctxt{% 5609 \scanctxt 5610 \catcode`\\=\other 5611 \catcode`\^^M=\other 5612 } 5613 5614 \def\macrobodyctxt{% 5615 \scanctxt 5616 \catcode`\{=\other 5617 \catcode`\}=\other 5618 \catcode`\^^M=\other 5619 \usembodybackslash 5620 } 5621 5622 \def\macroargctxt{% 5623 \scanctxt 5624 \catcode`\\=\other 5625 } 5626 5627 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 5628 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 5629 % where N is the macro parameter number. 5630 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 5631 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 5632 5633 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 5634 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 5635 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 5636 } 5637 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 5638 5639 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 5640 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 5641 5642 \def\macroxxx#1{% 5643 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 5644 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 5645 \paramno=0% 5646 \else 5647 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 5648 \fi 5649 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 5650 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 5651 \else 5652 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 5653 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 5654 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 5655 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 5656 % Add the macroname to \macrolist 5657 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% 5658 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 5659 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% 5660 \fi 5661 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 5662 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 5663 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 5664 \fi} 5665 5666 \parseargdef\unmacro{% 5667 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 5668 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 5669 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 5670 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 5671 \begingroup 5672 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 5673 \let\do\unmacrodo 5674 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 5675 \endgroup 5676 \else 5677 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 5678 \fi 5679 } 5680 5681 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 5682 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 5683 % 5684 \def\unmacrodo#1{% 5685 \ifx#1\relax 5686 % remove this 5687 \else 5688 \noexpand\do \noexpand #1% 5689 \fi 5690 } 5691 5692 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 5693 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 5694 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 5695 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 5696 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 5697 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 5698 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 5699 5700 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 5701 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 5702 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 5703 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 5704 5705 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 5706 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 5707 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 5708 % it to # just before using the token list produced. 5709 % 5710 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 5711 % the macro is used. 5712 5713 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 5714 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 5715 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 5716 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 5717 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 5718 \advance\paramno by 1% 5719 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 5720 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 5721 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 5722 \fi\next} 5723 5724 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 5725 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 5726 5727 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 5728 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 5729 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 5730 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 5731 5732 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 5733 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 5734 % Much magic with \expandafter here. 5735 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 5736 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 5737 \def\defmacro{% 5738 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 5739 \ifrecursive 5740 \ifcase\paramno 5741 % 0 5742 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5743 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 5744 \or % 1 5745 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5746 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 5747 \noexpand\braceorline 5748 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 5749 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 5750 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 5751 \else % many 5752 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5753 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 5754 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 5755 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 5756 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 5757 \expandafter\expandafter 5758 \expandafter\xdef 5759 \expandafter\expandafter 5760 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 5761 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 5762 \fi 5763 \else 5764 \ifcase\paramno 5765 % 0 5766 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5767 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 5768 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 5769 \or % 1 5770 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5771 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 5772 \noexpand\braceorline 5773 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 5774 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 5775 \egroup 5776 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 5777 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 5778 \else % many 5779 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 5780 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 5781 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 5782 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 5783 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 5784 \expandafter\expandafter 5785 \expandafter\xdef 5786 \expandafter\expandafter 5787 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 5788 \paramlist{% 5789 \egroup 5790 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 5791 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 5792 \fi 5793 \fi} 5794 5795 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 5796 5797 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 5798 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 5799 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 5800 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 5801 \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 5802 \def\braceorlinexxx{% 5803 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 5804 \expandafter\parsearg 5805 \fi \next} 5806 5807 % We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not 5808 % expanded by \write. 5809 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% 5810 \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} 5811 5812 % For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the 5813 % arguments (if present). Of course this is not nearly correct, but it 5814 % is the best we can do for now. makeinfo does not expand macros in the 5815 % argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex 5816 % isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \. 5817 % 5818 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5819 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5820 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5821 % 5822 \def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup 5823 \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}% 5824 \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} 5825 5826 5827 % @alias. 5828 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 5829 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 5830 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 5831 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 5832 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 5833 {% 5834 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 5835 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 5836 }% 5837 \next 5838 } 5839 5840 5841 \message{cross references,} 5842 5843 \newwrite\auxfile 5844 5845 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 5846 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 5847 5848 % @inforef is relatively simple. 5849 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 5850 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 5851 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 5852 5853 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 5854 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 5855 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 5856 % @node foo , bar , ... 5857 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 5858 % 5859 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 5860 % 5861 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 5862 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 5863 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 5864 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 5865 5866 \let\nwnode=\node 5867 \let\lastnode=\empty 5868 5869 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 5870 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 5871 % 5872 \def\donoderef#1{% 5873 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 5874 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 5875 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 5876 \fi 5877 } 5878 5879 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 5880 % 5881 \newcount\savesfregister 5882 % 5883 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 5884 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 5885 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 5886 5887 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 5888 % anchor), which consists of three parts: 5889 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, 5890 % or the anchor name. 5891 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 5892 % empty for anchors. 5893 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 5894 % 5895 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 5896 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 5897 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 5898 % 5899 \def\setref#1#2{% 5900 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 5901 \iflinks 5902 {% 5903 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 5904 \turnoffactive 5905 \otherbackslash 5906 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 5907 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 5908 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 5909 }% 5910 \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% 5911 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 5912 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 5913 \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout 5914 }% 5915 \fi 5916 } 5917 5918 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 5919 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 5920 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 5921 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 5922 % 5923 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 5924 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 5925 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 5926 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 5927 \unsepspaces 5928 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 5929 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 5930 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 5931 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 5932 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 5933 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 5934 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 5935 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 5936 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 5937 \else 5938 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 5939 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 5940 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 5941 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 5942 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 5943 \else 5944 \ifhavexrefs 5945 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 5946 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 5947 \else 5948 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 5949 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 5950 \fi% 5951 \fi 5952 \fi 5953 \fi 5954 % 5955 % Make link in pdf output. 5956 \ifpdf 5957 \leavevmode 5958 \getfilename{#4}% 5959 {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash 5960 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 5961 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 5962 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}% 5963 \else 5964 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 5965 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}% 5966 \fi 5967 }% 5968 \linkcolor 5969 \fi 5970 % 5971 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 5972 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 5973 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 5974 {% 5975 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 5976 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 5977 \indexnofonts 5978 \turnoffactive 5979 \otherbackslash 5980 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 5981 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 5982 }% 5983 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 5984 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 5985 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 5986 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 5987 \refx{#1-snt}% 5988 \else 5989 \printedrefname 5990 \fi 5991 % 5992 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 5993 % "in MANUALNAME". 5994 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 5995 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 5996 \fi 5997 \else 5998 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 5999 % 6000 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 6001 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 6002 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 6003 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 6004 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 6005 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 6006 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6007 \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 6008 \else 6009 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 6010 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 6011 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 6012 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 6013 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 6014 {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash 6015 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 6016 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 6017 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 6018 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 6019 }% 6020 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 6021 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 6022 % 6023 % But we always want a comma and a space: 6024 ,\space 6025 % 6026 % output the `page 3'. 6027 \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 6028 \fi 6029 \fi 6030 \endlink 6031 \endgroup} 6032 6033 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 6034 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 6035 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 6036 % one that Bob is working on :). 6037 % 6038 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 6039 6040 % Things referred to by \setref. 6041 % 6042 \def\Ynothing{} 6043 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} 6044 \def\Ynumbered{% 6045 \ifnum\secno=0 6046 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 6047 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 6048 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 6049 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 6050 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 6051 \else 6052 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 6053 \fi\fi\fi 6054 } 6055 \def\Yappendix{% 6056 \ifnum\secno=0 6057 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 6058 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 6059 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 6060 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 6061 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 6062 \else 6063 \putwordSection@tie 6064 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 6065 \fi\fi\fi 6066 } 6067 6068 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 6069 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 6070 % 6071 \def\refx#1#2{% 6072 {% 6073 \indexnofonts 6074 \otherbackslash 6075 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 6076 \csname XR#1\endcsname 6077 }% 6078 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 6079 % If not defined, say something at least. 6080 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 6081 \iflinks 6082 \ifhavexrefs 6083 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 6084 \else 6085 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 6086 \global\warnedxrefstrue 6087 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 6088 \fi 6089 \fi 6090 \fi 6091 \else 6092 % It's defined, so just use it. 6093 \thisrefX 6094 \fi 6095 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 6096 } 6097 6098 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 6099 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 6100 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 6101 % 6102 \def\xrdef#1#2{% 6103 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. 6104 % 6105 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 6106 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname 6107 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 6108 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 6109 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 6110 % 6111 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 6112 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 6113 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 6114 \else 6115 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 6116 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 6117 \fi 6118 % 6119 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 6120 % for later use in \listoffloats. 6121 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% 6122 \fi 6123 } 6124 6125 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 6126 % 6127 \def\tryauxfile{% 6128 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 6129 \ifeof 1 \else 6130 \readauxfile 6131 \global\havexrefstrue 6132 \fi 6133 \closein 1 6134 } 6135 6136 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup 6137 \catcode`\^^@=\other 6138 \catcode`\^^A=\other 6139 \catcode`\^^B=\other 6140 \catcode`\^^C=\other 6141 \catcode`\^^D=\other 6142 \catcode`\^^E=\other 6143 \catcode`\^^F=\other 6144 \catcode`\^^G=\other 6145 \catcode`\^^H=\other 6146 \catcode`\^^K=\other 6147 \catcode`\^^L=\other 6148 \catcode`\^^N=\other 6149 \catcode`\^^P=\other 6150 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 6151 \catcode`\^^R=\other 6152 \catcode`\^^S=\other 6153 \catcode`\^^T=\other 6154 \catcode`\^^U=\other 6155 \catcode`\^^V=\other 6156 \catcode`\^^W=\other 6157 \catcode`\^^X=\other 6158 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 6159 \catcode`\^^[=\other 6160 \catcode`\^^\=\other 6161 \catcode`\^^]=\other 6162 \catcode`\^^^=\other 6163 \catcode`\^^_=\other 6164 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 6165 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 6166 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 6167 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 6168 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 6169 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 6170 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 6171 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 6172 % 6173 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 6174 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 6175 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 6176 % 6177 \catcode`\^=\other 6178 % 6179 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 6180 \catcode`\~=\other 6181 \catcode`\[=\other 6182 \catcode`\]=\other 6183 \catcode`\"=\other 6184 \catcode`\_=\other 6185 \catcode`\|=\other 6186 \catcode`\<=\other 6187 \catcode`\>=\other 6188 \catcode`\$=\other 6189 \catcode`\#=\other 6190 \catcode`\&=\other 6191 \catcode`\%=\other 6192 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 6193 % 6194 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 6195 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 6196 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 6197 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 6198 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 6199 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 6200 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 6201 \catcode`\\=\other 6202 % 6203 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 6204 {% 6205 \count 1=128 6206 \def\loop{% 6207 \catcode\count 1=\other 6208 \advance\count 1 by 1 6209 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi 6210 }% 6211 }% 6212 % 6213 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 6214 \catcode`\{=1 6215 \catcode`\}=2 6216 \catcode`\@=0 6217 % 6218 \input \jobname.aux 6219 \endgroup} 6220 6221 6222 \message{insertions,} 6223 % including footnotes. 6224 6225 \newcount \footnoteno 6226 6227 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 6228 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 6229 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 6230 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 6231 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 6232 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 6233 6234 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 6235 \let\footnotestyle=\comment 6236 6237 {\catcode `\@=11 6238 % 6239 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 6240 \gdef\footnote{% 6241 \let\indent=\ptexindent 6242 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 6243 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 6244 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 6245 % 6246 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 6247 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 6248 \let\@sf\empty 6249 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 6250 % 6251 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 6252 \unskip 6253 \thisfootno\@sf 6254 \dofootnote 6255 }% 6256 6257 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 6258 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 6259 % 6260 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 6261 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 6262 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 6263 % 6264 \gdef\dofootnote{% 6265 \insert\footins\bgroup 6266 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 6267 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 6268 % So reset some parameters. 6269 \hsize=\pagewidth 6270 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 6271 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 6272 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 6273 \floatingpenalty\@MM 6274 \leftskip\z@skip 6275 \rightskip\z@skip 6276 \spaceskip\z@skip 6277 \xspaceskip\z@skip 6278 \parindent\defaultparindent 6279 % 6280 \smallfonts \rm 6281 % 6282 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 6283 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 6284 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 6285 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 6286 \let\noindent = \relax 6287 % 6288 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 6289 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 6290 \everypar = {\hang}% 6291 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 6292 % 6293 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 6294 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 6295 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 6296 \footstrut 6297 \futurelet\next\fo@t 6298 } 6299 }%end \catcode `\@=11 6300 6301 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 6302 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 6303 % would be lost. 6304 % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 6305 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 6306 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 6307 6308 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 6309 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 6310 % out prematurely. 6311 % 6312 \def\startsavinginserts{% 6313 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 6314 \let\insert\saveinsert 6315 \else 6316 \let\checkinserts\relax 6317 \fi 6318 } 6319 6320 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 6321 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 6322 % 6323 \def\saveinsert#1{% 6324 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 6325 \afterassignment\next 6326 % swallow the left brace 6327 \let\temp = 6328 } 6329 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 6330 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 6331 6332 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 6333 6334 \def\placesaveins#1{% 6335 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 6336 {\box#1}% 6337 } 6338 6339 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 6340 { 6341 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 6342 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 6343 } 6344 6345 % initialization: 6346 \def\newsaveins #1{% 6347 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 6348 \next 6349 } 6350 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% 6351 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 6352 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 6353 \checksaveins #1}% 6354 } 6355 6356 % initialize: 6357 \let\checkinserts\empty 6358 \newsaveins\footins 6359 \newsaveins\margin 6360 6361 6362 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 6363 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 6364 % 6365 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 6366 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 6367 % undone and the next image would fail. 6368 \openin 1 = epsf.tex 6369 \ifeof 1 \else 6370 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 6371 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 6372 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 6373 \input epsf.tex 6374 \fi 6375 \closein 1 6376 % 6377 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 6378 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf 6379 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 6380 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 6381 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 6382 % 6383 \def\image#1{% 6384 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 6385 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 6386 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 6387 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 6388 \global\warnednoepsftrue 6389 \fi 6390 \else 6391 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 6392 \fi 6393 } 6394 % 6395 % Arguments to @image: 6396 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 6397 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 6398 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 6399 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 6400 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 6401 \newif\ifimagevmode 6402 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 6403 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 6404 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 6405 % If the image is by itself, center it. 6406 \ifvmode 6407 \imagevmodetrue 6408 \nobreak\bigskip 6409 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 6410 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 6411 % above and below. 6412 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 6413 \nobreak 6414 \line\bgroup\hss 6415 \fi 6416 % 6417 % Output the image. 6418 \ifpdf 6419 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 6420 \else 6421 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 6422 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 6423 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 6424 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 6425 \fi 6426 % 6427 \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image 6428 \endgroup} 6429 6430 6431 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 6432 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 6433 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 6434 % 6435 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 6436 6437 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 6438 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 6439 6440 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 6441 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 6442 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 6443 % 6444 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 6445 % be referable. 6446 % 6447 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 6448 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 6449 % 6450 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 6451 % chapter-level command. 6452 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 6453 % 6454 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 6455 \let\thiscaption=\empty 6456 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 6457 % 6458 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 6459 % 6460 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 6461 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 6462 % 6463 \startsavinginserts 6464 % 6465 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 6466 \par 6467 % 6468 \vtop\bgroup 6469 \def\floattype{#1}% 6470 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 6471 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 6472 % 6473 \ifx\floattype\empty 6474 \let\safefloattype=\empty 6475 \else 6476 {% 6477 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 6478 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 6479 \indexnofonts 6480 \turnoffactive 6481 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 6482 }% 6483 \fi 6484 % 6485 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 6486 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 6487 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 6488 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 6489 % 6490 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 6491 \global\advance\floatno by 1 6492 % 6493 {% 6494 % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the 6495 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 6496 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 6497 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 6498 % lists of floats. 6499 % 6500 \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 6501 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 6502 }% 6503 \fi 6504 % 6505 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 6506 \vskip\parskip 6507 % 6508 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 6509 \restorefirstparagraphindent 6510 } 6511 6512 % we have these possibilities: 6513 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 6514 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 6515 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 6516 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo 6517 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 6518 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 6519 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 6520 % @float & no caption: 6521 % 6522 \def\Efloat{% 6523 \let\floatident = \empty 6524 % 6525 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 6526 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 6527 % 6528 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 6529 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 6530 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 6531 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 6532 \fi 6533 % the number. 6534 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 6535 \fi 6536 % 6537 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 6538 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 6539 \let\captionline = \floatident 6540 % 6541 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 6542 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 6543 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 6544 \fi 6545 % 6546 % caption text. 6547 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 6548 \fi 6549 % 6550 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 6551 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 6552 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 6553 \vskip.5\parskip 6554 \captionline 6555 % 6556 % Space below caption. 6557 \vskip\parskip 6558 \fi 6559 % 6560 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 6561 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 6562 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 6563 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 6564 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 6565 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 6566 {% 6567 \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash 6568 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 6569 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 6570 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 6571 \scanexp{% 6572 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 6573 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 6574 \thiscaption 6575 \else 6576 \thisshortcaption 6577 \fi 6578 }% 6579 }% 6580 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 6581 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 6582 }% 6583 \fi 6584 \egroup % end of \vtop 6585 % 6586 % place the captured inserts 6587 % 6588 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 6589 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 6590 % 6591 \checkinserts 6592 } 6593 6594 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 6595 % 6596 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 6597 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 6598 } 6599 6600 % @caption, @shortcaption 6601 % 6602 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 6603 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 6604 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 6605 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 6606 6607 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 6608 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 6609 \def\getfloatno#1{% 6610 \ifx#1\relax 6611 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 6612 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 6613 % 6614 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 6615 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 6616 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 6617 \fi 6618 \let\floatno#1% 6619 } 6620 6621 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 6622 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 6623 % first read the @float command. 6624 % 6625 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 6626 6627 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 6628 % distinguish floats from other xref types. 6629 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 6630 6631 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 6632 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 6633 % \thissection value which we \setref above. 6634 % 6635 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 6636 % 6637 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 6638 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 6639 % 6640 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 6641 \def\temp{#1}% 6642 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 6643 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 6644 } 6645 6646 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 6647 % 6648 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% 6649 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 6650 {% 6651 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 6652 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 6653 \indexnofonts 6654 \turnoffactive 6655 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 6656 }% 6657 % 6658 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 6659 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 6660 \ifhavexrefs 6661 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 6662 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 6663 \fi 6664 \else 6665 \begingroup 6666 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 6667 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 6668 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 6669 \endgroup 6670 \fi 6671 } 6672 6673 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 6674 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 6675 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 6676 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 6677 % 6678 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 6679 % they won't appear in the aux file). 6680 % 6681 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 6682 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 6683 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 6684 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 6685 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 6686 % in pdf output. 6687 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 6688 % 6689 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 6690 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 6691 \writeentry 6692 }} 6693 6694 \message{localization,} 6695 % and i18n. 6696 6697 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after 6698 % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything 6699 % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. 6700 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. 6701 % 6702 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 6703 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 6704 % Read the file if it exists. 6705 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 6706 \ifeof 1 6707 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 6708 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 6709 \else 6710 \input txi-#1.tex 6711 \fi 6712 \closein 1 6713 \endgroup 6714 } 6715 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 6716 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory 6717 should work if nowhere else does.} 6718 6719 6720 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most 6721 % likely, but for now just recognize it. 6722 \let\documentencoding = \comment 6723 6724 6725 % Page size parameters. 6726 % 6727 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 6728 6729 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 6730 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 6731 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 6732 6733 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 6734 \vbadness = 10000 6735 6736 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 6737 \hbadness = 2000 6738 6739 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. 6740 \widowpenalty=10000 6741 \clubpenalty=10000 6742 6743 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 6744 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 6745 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 6746 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 6747 % 6748 \def\setemergencystretch{% 6749 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 6750 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 6751 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 6752 \else 6753 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 6754 \fi 6755 } 6756 6757 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; 6758 % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8) 6759 % physical page width. 6760 % 6761 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 6762 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 6763 % 6764 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 6765 \voffset = #3\relax 6766 \topskip = #6\relax 6767 \splittopskip = \topskip 6768 % 6769 \vsize = #1\relax 6770 \advance\vsize by \topskip 6771 \outervsize = \vsize 6772 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 6773 \pageheight = \vsize 6774 % 6775 \hsize = #2\relax 6776 \outerhsize = \hsize 6777 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 6778 \pagewidth = \hsize 6779 % 6780 \normaloffset = #4\relax 6781 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 6782 % 6783 \ifpdf 6784 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 6785 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 6786 \fi 6787 % 6788 \setleading{\textleading} 6789 % 6790 \parindent = \defaultparindent 6791 \setemergencystretch 6792 } 6793 6794 % @letterpaper (the default). 6795 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 6796 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 6797 \textleading = 13.2pt 6798 % 6799 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 6800 \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% 6801 {\voffset}{.25in}% 6802 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 6803 {11in}{8.5in}% 6804 }} 6805 6806 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. 6807 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 6808 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 6809 \textleading = 12pt 6810 % 6811 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 6812 {\voffset}{.25in}% 6813 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 6814 {9.25in}{7in}% 6815 % 6816 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 6817 \tolerance = 700 6818 \hfuzz = 1pt 6819 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 6820 \defbodyindent = .5cm 6821 }} 6822 6823 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 6824 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 6825 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 6826 \textleading = 13.2pt 6827 % 6828 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 6829 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 6830 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 6831 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 6832 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 6833 % your texinfo source file like this: 6834 % @tex 6835 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 6836 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 6837 % @end tex 6838 \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} 6839 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 6840 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 6841 {297mm}{210mm}% 6842 % 6843 \tolerance = 700 6844 \hfuzz = 1pt 6845 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 6846 \defbodyindent = 5mm 6847 }} 6848 6849 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 6850 % From romildo (a] urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 6851 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 6852 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 6853 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 6854 \textleading = 12.5pt 6855 % 6856 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 6857 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 6858 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 6859 {210mm}{148mm}% 6860 % 6861 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 6862 \tolerance = 800 6863 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 6864 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 6865 \defbodyindent = 2mm 6866 \tableindent = 12mm 6867 }} 6868 6869 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 6870 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 6871 \afourpaper 6872 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 6873 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 6874 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 6875 {297mm}{210mm}% 6876 % 6877 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 6878 \globaldefs = 0 6879 }} 6880 6881 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 6882 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 6883 \afourpaper 6884 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 6885 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 6886 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 6887 {297mm}{210mm}% 6888 \globaldefs = 0 6889 }} 6890 6891 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 6892 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 6893 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 6894 % 6895 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 6896 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 6897 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 6898 \globaldefs = 1 6899 % 6900 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 6901 \setleading{\textleading}% 6902 % 6903 \dimen0 = #1 6904 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 6905 % 6906 \dimen2 = \hsize 6907 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 6908 % 6909 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 6910 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 6911 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 6912 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 6913 }} 6914 6915 % Set default to letter. 6916 % 6917 \letterpaper 6918 6919 6920 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 6921 6922 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 6923 \catcode`\"=\other 6924 \catcode`\~=\other 6925 \catcode`\^=\other 6926 \catcode`\_=\other 6927 \catcode`\|=\other 6928 \catcode`\<=\other 6929 \catcode`\>=\other 6930 \catcode`\+=\other 6931 \catcode`\$=\other 6932 \def\normaldoublequote{"} 6933 \def\normaltilde{~} 6934 \def\normalcaret{^} 6935 \def\normalunderscore{_} 6936 \def\normalverticalbar{|} 6937 \def\normalless{<} 6938 \def\normalgreater{>} 6939 \def\normalplus{+} 6940 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 6941 6942 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 6943 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 6944 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. 6945 % 6946 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 6947 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 6948 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 6949 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 6950 % 6951 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 6952 6953 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 6954 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 6955 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 6956 % this is not a problem. 6957 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 6958 6959 % Turn off all special characters except @ 6960 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 6961 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 6962 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 6963 6964 \catcode`\"=\active 6965 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 6966 \let"=\activedoublequote 6967 \catcode`\~=\active 6968 \def~{{\tt\char126}} 6969 \chardef\hat=`\^ 6970 \catcode`\^=\active 6971 \def^{{\tt \hat}} 6972 6973 \catcode`\_=\active 6974 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 6975 % Subroutine for the previous macro. 6976 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 6977 6978 \catcode`\|=\active 6979 \def|{{\tt\char124}} 6980 \chardef \less=`\< 6981 \catcode`\<=\active 6982 \def<{{\tt \less}} 6983 \chardef \gtr=`\> 6984 \catcode`\>=\active 6985 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} 6986 \catcode`\+=\active 6987 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 6988 \catcode`\$=\active 6989 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 6990 6991 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 6992 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 6993 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 6994 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 6995 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 6996 6997 \catcode`\@=0 6998 6999 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 7000 % as in \char`\\. 7001 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 7002 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 7003 7004 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 7005 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 7006 % catcode other. 7007 {\catcode`\\=\active 7008 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 7009 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 7010 } 7011 7012 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 7013 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 7014 7015 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. 7016 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}} 7017 7018 \catcode`\\=\active 7019 7020 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters 7021 % even after parsing them. 7022 @def@turnoffactive{% 7023 @let"=@normaldoublequote 7024 @let\=@realbackslash 7025 @let~=@normaltilde 7026 @let^=@normalcaret 7027 @let_=@normalunderscore 7028 @let|=@normalverticalbar 7029 @let<=@normalless 7030 @let>=@normalgreater 7031 @let+=@normalplus 7032 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 7033 @unsepspaces 7034 } 7035 7036 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 7037 % the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in 7038 % effect.) 7039 % 7040 @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash} 7041 7042 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 7043 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 7044 @otherifyactive 7045 7046 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 7047 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 7048 % a backslash. 7049 % 7050 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 7051 @global@let\ = @eatinput 7052 7053 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 7054 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 7055 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 7056 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input 7057 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 7058 % 7059 @gdef@fixbackslash{% 7060 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 7061 @catcode`+=@active 7062 @catcode`@_=@active 7063 } 7064 7065 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 7066 @escapechar = `@@ 7067 7068 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 7069 @catcode`@& = @other 7070 @catcode`@# = @other 7071 @catcode`@% = @other 7072 7073 7074 @c Local variables: 7075 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 7076 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 7077 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 7078 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 7079 @c time-stamp-end: "}" 7080 @c End: 7081 7082 @c vim:sw=2: 7083 7084 @ignore 7085 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 7086 @end ignore 7087